128 verses. It is widely reported that it was revealed in the Meccan period; it is also reported that the closing verses (126-128 in particular) were revealed in the Medinan period. It takes its name from the word ٱلنَّحْل (al-naḥl — the honey bee) in the sixty-eighth verse.
A second name for the sūra is also transmitted in the classical sources: sūrat al-niʿam — the sūra of favours. I transmit this naming as a report; but the ground of the name is verifiable from the text itself, and it is the backbone of this commentary as well.
| Block | Verses | Subject | What closes the block |
|---|---|---|---|
| I | 1-2 | The coming of the command, and the descent of the angels with the rūḥ | Fa-ttaqūn (2) |
| II | 3-18 | The first enumeration of favours — from the livestock to the star | Wa in taʿuddū niʿmata'llāhi lā tuḥṣūhā (18) |
| III | 19-40 | The unresponsiveness of those called, arrogance, denial of the hereafter | Kun fa-yakūn (40) |
| IV | 41-64 | The emigration, the humanity of the messengers, the prostration of the shadows, the scene of the infant daughter | Hudan wa raḥmatan li-qawmin yuʾminūn (64) |
| V | 65-83 | The second enumeration of favours — water, milk, the bee, spouses, houses, garments | Wa aktharuhumu'l-kāfirūn (83) |
| VI | 84-89 | The day of the witnesses, and the sending down of the Book as tibyān | Wa bushrā li'l-muslimīn (89) |
| VII | 90-105 | The command of justice, the covenant, the woman who unravels her thread, the objection "you are substituting" | Wa ulāʾika humu'l-kādhibūn (105) |
| VIII | 106-128 | The dispensation under compulsion, the parable of the secure town, lawful and forbidden, Abraham (Ibrāhīm), the method of calling, patience | Wa'lladhīna hum muḥsinūn (128) |
The backbone of the sūra is an enumeration. It begins at the fifth verse, is cut off by a single sentence at the eighteenth, opens again at the sixty-fifth, and closes at the eighty-first. Everything that passes in between — argument, history, ruling, parable — has been placed between these two enumerations.
The table below is the order of the things the sūra enumerates. The order is the order of the verses themselves; nothing has been added.
| # | Verse | What is enumerated | The word in the verse |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 5 | The livestock — warmth, benefits, food | al-anʿām · difʾ · manāfiʿ |
| 2 | 6 | The beauty taken from the same animals — the evening return and the morning release | jamāl · turīḥūna · tasraḥūn |
| 3 | 7 | The carrying of loads — to a land you could not reach by your own strength | athqālakum · bi-shiqqi'l-anfus |
| 4 | 8 | Horses, mules, donkeys — to ride, and adornment; and what you do not know | al-khayl · al-bighāl · al-ḥamīr · zīna |
| 5 | 10 | Water from the sky — drink, and trees in which you pasture | sharāb · shajar · tusīmūn |
| 6 | 11 | Crops, olives, date palms, grapes, all the fruits | al-zarʿ · al-zaytūn · al-nakhīl · al-aʿnāb |
| 7 | 12 | Night, day, sun, moon; the stars made subservient | sakhkhara · musakhkharātun bi-amrih |
| 8 | 13 | What is strewn over the earth, differing in colour | dharaʾa · mukhtalifan alwānuh |
| 9 | 14 | The sea — fresh meat, ornament, ships that cleave it | laḥman ṭariyyā · ḥilya · mawākhir |
| 10 | 15 | Mountains, rivers, roads | rawāsī · anhār · subul |
| 11 | 16 | Landmarks, and the star | ʿalāmāt · bi'l-najmi hum yahtadūn |
| — | 17-18 | The enumeration is cut off: a question and a ruling | A-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq · lā tuḥṣūhā |
| 12 | 65 | Water from the sky — the reviving of dead ground | fa-aḥyā bihi'l-arḍa baʿda mawtihā |
| 13 | 66 | Milk — from between the farth and the blood | labanan khāliṣan sāʾighan |
| 14 | 67 | The fruit of date palms and vines — sakar and good provision | sakaran wa rizqan ḥasanā |
| 15 | 68-69 | The bee — houses, paths, a drink of differing colours, healing | awḥā · buyūtā · shifāʾun li'l-nās |
| 16 | 72 | Spouses, sons, grandchildren, wholesome provisions | azwāj · banīn · ḥafada · ṭayyibāt |
| 17 | 78 | Hearing, eyes, hearts — when you knew nothing at all | al-samʿ · al-abṣār · al-afʾida |
| 18 | 79 | Birds held up in the air | musakhkharātin fī jawwi'l-samāʾ |
| 19 | 80 | Houses, and tents of hide; wool, fur, hair | sakanā · buyūtā · aṣwāf · awbār · ashʿār |
| 20 | 81 | Shade, shelters in the mountains, two kinds of garment | ẓilāl · aknān · sarābīl |
| — | end of 81 | The enumeration closes: with a sentence of purpose | Ka-dhālika yutimmu niʿmatahū ʿalaykum laʿallakum tuslimūn |
This is the most conspicuous structural sign in the sūra, and it can be verified from the text: nowhere does the enumeration end of itself. At the end of every section there comes either a question or a ruling.
| Where | The sentence that cuts in | Kind |
|---|---|---|
| end of 11 | Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yatafakkarūn | A qualification — it names whom it addresses |
| end of 12 | Li-qawmin yaʿqilūn | A qualification |
| end of 13 | Li-qawmin yadhdhakkarūn | A qualification |
| 17 | A-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq | A question |
| 18 | Wa in taʿuddū niʿmata'llāhi lā tuḥṣūhā | A ruling — the enumeration is declared impossible |
| 53-55 | Thumma idhā kashafa'l-ḍurra ʿankum idhā farīqun minkum bi-rabbihim yushrikūn | A diagnosis |
| end of 71 | A-fa-bi-niʿmati'llāhi yajḥadūn | A question |
| end of 72 | A-fa-bi'l-bāṭili yuʾminūna wa bi-niʿmati'llāhi hum yakfurūn | A question |
| end of 81 | Ka-dhālika yutimmu niʿmatahū ʿalaykum laʿallakum tuslimūn | A purpose — why the enumeration is made |
| 83 | Yaʿrifūna niʿmata'llāhi thumma yunkirūnahā | A diagnosis — the enumeration closes |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is these ten points of interruption: having enumerated the favours, the sūra does not send the reader back to the head of the list. Each time it ties the list to a question or to a ruling. The work of the enumeration is therefore not to give information; it is to open an accounting.
And the eighteenth verse declares the impossibility of the list itself: lā tuḥṣūhā — "you cannot count them". In the very act of making an enumeration, the sūra says the enumeration will not be finished. This is treated in detail below.
أَتَىٰٓ أَمْرُ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا تَسْتَعْجِلُوهُ سُبْحَٰنَهُۥ وَتَعَٰلَىٰ عَمَّا يُشْرِكُونَ
"The command of God has come; do not seek to hasten it. He is far removed from, and exalted above, what they associate with Him."
The whole sentence gathers into two expressions, and the entire matter lies in them: atā (it has come) — a perfect verb; and immediately after it fa-lā tastaʿjilūh (do not seek to hasten it) — a prohibition which shows that it has not yet come.
That is, the verse forbids that haste be asked for over the very thing it says has come. Had it come, no haste could be asked for.
This structure was analysed in detail at two places in this commentary, and I take them as the ground here:
- At al-Qamar, 54/1 (iqtarabati'l-sāʿatu wa'nshaqqa'l-qamar) the two distinct tasks of the perfect verb were tabulated: the expression of certainty (a future event whose occurrence is certain being told as though it had already happened) and the narration of an event genuinely past. And this verse was already named there as the example of the first kind.
- At al-Anbiyāʾ, 21/1 (iqtaraba li'l-nāsi ḥisābuhum) the same pattern was treated once more, and the sense of iqtaraba that comes from Form VIII — "the closing of a distance" — was recorded.
I do not repeat it here. What belongs here is the comparison of the three verses — for the three are not doing the same work:
| Place | Verb | Mood | What it conveys | The sentence beside it |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| al-Qamar 54/1 | Iqtaraba — Form VIII | Perfect | The motion of drawing near — the distance is closing | Wa'nshaqqa'l-qamar — an event |
| al-Anbiyāʾ 21/1 | Iqtaraba — Form VIII | Perfect | Drawing near — and ascribed to those whose reckoning it is | Wa hum fī ghaflatin muʿriḍūn — a state |
| al-Naḥl 16/1 | Atā — Form I | Perfect | Arrival — no distance left, it has come | Fa-lā tastaʿjilūh — a prohibition |
The difference must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being the choice of verb: al-Qamar and al-Anbiyāʾ convey drawing near — iqtaraba. al-Naḥl goes past even drawing near and conveys arrival: atā. Of the three verses this is the one that goes furthest. And it is precisely the verse that goes furthest which, immediately afterwards, forbids haste.
The contrast lies inside the sentence, and the lexicographers dwell on it. In rhetoric this usage is generally called the highest degree of certainty: the certainty of the event is so complete that the future tense fell short and the perfect was used.
And the addressee of the prohibition is worth recording. Lā tastaʿjilū — plural. It is not said who is hastening; but those who hasten are not the ones who do not want it to come, they are the ones who do. This demand will be named several times in the verses that follow.
| Branch | Sense | Plural |
|---|---|---|
| أَمْر (command) | To command, to order | awāmir |
| أَمْر (affair, event) | A situation, a state, a thing that comes to pass | umūr |
| View | What amru'llāh is | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The Hour | Istiʿjāl (asking for haste) is used in the Qurʾān mostly of the Hour and of punishment |
| 2 | Punishment, retribution | Further on in the sūra what befell earlier peoples is recalled (26, 33-34) |
| 3 | God's decree / the decision He has taken | The widest sense of the word; in the next verse min amrih occurs from the same root |
But an internal note must be entered: the second verse uses the same root once more — yunazzilu'l-malāʾikata bi'l-rūḥi min amrih. Two consecutive verses thus carry the same word: in the one a command that comes, in the other a command that descends.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is this repetition: the sūra sets the command whose hastening is forbidden beside another command that is in the course of descending. What is awaited has not yet come; but news of what ought to be awaited has long since arrived.
The sentence will occur twice in the sūra: in the first verse, and at the end of the third (taʿālā ʿammā yushrikūn). Only one verse stands between them. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
The root of subḥān (س-ب-ح) has been analysed at many places in this commentary — al-Aʿlā, Yāsīn 36/36, al-Ḥashr and others: the core sense is to swim away through empty space or through water; from there, tanzīh — holding God clear of what does not befit Him. I do not repeat it here.
تَعَٰلَىٰ — root ع-ل-و: height. That it comes from Form VI (taʿālā) is worth recording: this form generally conveys reciprocity, but here it does the work the lexicographers call mubālagha (intensification) — that the height is of Himself.
يُنَزِّلُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةَ بِٱلرُّوحِ مِنْ أَمْرِهِۦ عَلَىٰ مَن يَشَآءُ مِنْ عِبَادِهِۦٓ أَنْ أَنذِرُوٓا۟ أَنَّهُۥ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّآ أَنَا۠ فَٱتَّقُونِ
Yunazzilu'l-malāʾikata bi'l-rūḥi min amrihī ʿalā man yashāʾu min ʿibādih, an andhirū annahū lā ilāha illā anā fa-ttaqūn
"He sends down the angels with the rūḥ of His command upon whom He wills of His servants: 'Warn: there is no god but I; so guard yourselves against Me.'"
The tense of the verb shows it: atā (perfect) → yunazzilu (imperfect). And yunazzilu is Form II — the lexicographers record that here this form conveys repetition and gradualness (piece by piece, many times over).
I record this as an observation about the word order: the event whose certainty is announced is named once and in the perfect; the descent of the warning, as a verb still in progress. The mood of the sentences thus separates the character of the two events.
| View | What rūḥ is here | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Revelation | That at al-Shūrā 42/52 the Qurʾān is called rūḥan min amrinā; the same qualification as min amrih here |
| 2 | Gabriel | That the phrases rūḥ al-qudus and al-rūḥ al-amīn are used of the angel |
| 3 | Prophethood | The sense of the word as that which gives life; the reviving of dead hearts |
The first reading has the strongest internal ground, and I record this as an observation: the qualification min amrihī in the verse coincides word for word with the expression at al-Shūrā 42/52. In al-Shūrā it was tabulated that the root و-ح-ي is the densest root of that sūra and that the channels of revelation are enumerated at 42/51-52; I rely on that treatment. Even so I do not impose a preference: all three views are transmitted, and two of them do not exclude one another — revelation is what the angel carries.
عَلَىٰ مَن يَشَآءُ مِنْ عِبَادِهِ — and the one chosen is called a servant. Messengership is thus given as a task that arises from within servanthood, not as a station that takes a man outside it. This line will be drawn once more, and openly, in the forty-third verse of the sūra.
The imperative comes in the plural: andhirū — "warn". Yet the one upon whom the revelation descends is singular (man yashāʾu).
The lexicographers explain this in two ways: either it is addressed to the angels, or it is because the word man is singular in form and plural in sense. Both explanations are transmitted.
And the content of the warning is a single sentence: annahū lā ilāha illā anā. Worth recording: the warning is delivered not with a threat but with a statement. The threat comes only at the end of the sentence, and as a command: fa-ttaqūn.
And the change of person is striking; I record it as an observation about the word order: the sentence begins in the third person (yunazzilu … min amrihī … ʿibādihī), then shifts into the first (illā anā … fa-ttaqūni). In the middle of a report, the speaker Himself steps in. In Arabic this shift is called iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address), and the lexicographers record that it does the work of gathering attention.
خَلَقَ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضَ بِٱلْحَقِّ تَعَٰلَىٰ عَمَّا يُشْرِكُونَ · خَلَقَ ٱلْإِنسَٰنَ مِن نُّطْفَةٍ فَإِذَا هُوَ خَصِيمٌ مُّبِينٌ
Khalaqa'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa bi'l-ḥaqq, taʿālā ʿammā yushrikūn · Khalaqa'l-insāna min nuṭfatin fa-idhā huwa khaṣīmun mubīn
"He created the heavens and the earth in truth; He is exalted above what they associate with Him. · He created man from a drop; and behold, he is an open disputant."
Both verses begin with the same word: khalaqa. And the difference between their two objects establishes the whole evidential order of the sūra:
| Verse | What is created | Its outcome |
|---|---|---|
| 3 | The heavens and the earth | Bi'l-ḥaqq — with a purpose |
| 4 | Man | Khaṣīmun mubīn — an open disputant |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses stand back to back: the same verb, two objects; the one is named with its purpose, the other with its conduct. The universe keeps faith with its creation; man begins to dispute the moment after his.
This sentence occurs once more in the Qurʾān, in almost the same words, and it was treated there in detail.
At Yāsīn, 36/77 (a-wa-lam yara'l-insānu annā khalaqnāhu min nuṭfatin fa-idhā huwa khaṣīmun mubīn) the following were recorded, and I rely on that treatment:
- Idhā fujāʾiyya (the idhā that conveys suddenness): "and behold". The sentence leaps over every step between the drop and the disputant.
- Khaṣīm is on the faʿīl pattern, and in Arabic this pattern conveys a settled, fixed quality. Man is thus named not as "someone who disputes" but as "a disputant".
- The limit set by the method (Method) concerning nuṭfa: the word is not equated one to one with the terms of modern embryology; the evidence is that the beginning of man is not in his own hands.
I do not repeat it here. What belongs here is the difference between the contexts of the two verses, and that difference is large:
| Yā Sīn 36/77 | al-Naḥl 16/4 | |
|---|---|---|
| The head of the sentence | A-wa-lam yara'l-insān — a question | Khalaqa'l-insān — a statement |
| Who is speaking | What man has not seen is said | What the Creator has done is said |
| Where it stands | At the end of the sūra — after the evidence | At the beginning of the sūra — before the evidence |
| What follows it | Wa ḍaraba lanā mathalan wa nasiya khalqah | Wa'l-anʿāma khalaqahā lakum — the enumeration begins |
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the position of the two verses within their sūras: Yā Sīn uses this sentence as a conclusion — man's stance is named after all the evidence has been given. al-Naḥl uses the same sentence as a beginning. The diagnosis is entered first, the enumeration made afterwards.
And this has a consequence for the sūra: the ruling lā tuḥṣūhā (you cannot count them) that will come in the eighteenth verse rests upon the diagnosis of the fourth. The one who cannot count and the one who disputes are the same person.
The root خ-ص-م: to contend, to be an adversary, to go to law. Khuṣūma — litigation; khaṣm — the opposing party.
And this diagnosis must be read together with another root in this commentary. At al-Kahf, 18/54, it was said of man:
What was recorded in the al-Kahf section was this, and I rely on it: the root ج-د-ل was the whole backbone of Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), and it was tabulated there that what is condemned is disputation without ground (bi-ghayri sulṭānin atāhum); at al-Baqara, 2/197, the concrete sense of the root — to twist a rope tight — was analysed. And there was one further note in al-Kahf: the tendency is identified (54), then a limit is set (22).
I set the three verses side by side, because the three give the same diagnosis in three different words:
| Place | Word | Root | Pattern / form | What it says |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| al-Naḥl 16/4 | Khaṣīmun mubīn | خ-ص-م | Faʿīl — a settled attribute | The attribute won at once by what came out of a drop |
| Yā Sīn 36/77 | Khaṣīmun mubīn | خ-ص-م | Faʿīl | The attribute after the evidence has been seen |
| al-Kahf 18/54 | Akthara shayʾin jadalā | ج-د-ل | A specifying accusative — with akthara | More than anything else — comparative |
And this must be recorded, because it bears on the close of the sūra: having named man a disputant in the fourth verse, al-Naḥl teaches that same man the method of disputation in the hundred and twenty-fifth: wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses stand at the two ends of the sūra: the sūra neither forbids disputation nor praises it. In the fourth verse it identifies it as a fact; in the hundred and twenty-fifth it binds it to a form. This is the line recorded in al-Mujādala, where these two verses were already named side by side: jadal is an act that takes its value from its subject and its manner.
وَٱلْأَنْعَٰمَ خَلَقَهَا لَكُمْ فِيهَا دِفْءٌ وَمَنَٰفِعُ وَمِنْهَا تَأْكُلُونَ
And the construction of the opening must be recorded. The sentence does not say khalaqa'l-anʿāma lakum. It says: wa'l-anʿāma khalaqahā — the object is brought forward, and then the verb takes it up again with a pronoun.
In Arabic this is called ishtighāl, and the lexicographers record that it conveys ihtimām (giving prominence). The first item of the enumeration is thus brought forward at the level of word order too.
And the choice of that first item is worth recording: the enumeration begins not from the sky and not from the sea but from just outside the door of the house.
The concrete sense of the root: to grow warm, warmth. Difāʾ — the thing that warms; dafiya — he grew warm.
The lexicographers explain the word here specifically as clothing made from wool, hair and hide — that is, not the heat the animal gives off but the warming thing got from the animal. And this explanation has an internal ground: in the eighty-first verse sarābīla taqīkumu'l-ḥarr (garments that guard you from the heat) will occur, and in the eightieth wa min aṣwāfihā wa awbārihā wa ashʿārihā (from their wool, their fur and their hair).
What the sūra says in a single word in the fifth verse it thus repeats, unfolded, in the eightieth and eighty-first. This is a weave that can be verified from the text.
| Order | Expression | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Difʾ | Warmth — staying alive |
| 2 | Manāfiʿ | Benefits — left indefinite, plural |
| 3 | Wa minhā taʾkulūn | Food |
The middle item is worth recording: manāfiʿ is plural and its content is not given. Even in its first item, then, the list is left open within itself. This is a small rehearsal of what will be done openly in the eighth verse with wa yakhluqu mā lā taʿlamūn.
At Muḥammad, 47/12, it was already recorded that the word anʿām is tied to the list of favours in this sūra; I rely on that treatment.
وَلَكُمْ فِيهَا جَمَالٌ حِينَ تُرِيحُونَ وَحِينَ تَسْرَحُونَ
"And in them there is beauty for you, when you bring them home at evening and when you drive them out at morning."
The preceding verse enumerated three benefits: warmth, benefits, food. This verse adds a fourth thing, and what it adds is not a benefit.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses stand back to back: having enumerated utility, the sūra does not stop; it sets beauty beside utility. And it does so with a separate sentence, a separate word and a separate note of time.
One — the beauty comes with the qualification lakum (for you). The verse does not say "these animals are beautiful". It says: "in them there is beauty for you." Beauty is given not as a property of the object but as a relation established between the beholder and the object.
Two — the beauty is bound to two moments. It is stated not as a general condition but for two definite times:
| Verb | Root | Time | The scene |
|---|---|---|---|
| تُرِيحُونَ (turīḥūn) | ر-و-ح | Towards evening | The return of the herd from pasture |
| تَسْرَحُونَ (tasraḥūn) | س-ر-ح | Morning | The releasing of the herd to pasture |
Rawāḥ — to come back towards evening; al-murāḥ is the place where the animals pass the night. At al-Rūm, 30/17-18, the enumeration of the times of day and the building of the pair ʿishāʾ / ibkār were treated; the two times here are of the same family, but the scale is different: there the times were enumerated for glorification, here for looking.
Sarḥ — to let loose, to set free. In the root there is the untying of a bond; sarraḥahū — he set it loose, let it go.
Three — the order in the wording is reversed, and this is striking. The natural order would be to begin with morning and end with evening. The verse says first turīḥūn (the evening return), then tasraḥūn (the morning release).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order itself: the return is named before the release. And of the two scenes it is the return that fills the eye more — the herd comes in a body, with dust, with sound, in the evening light. The morning release is a scattering. In naming the beauty the verse thus puts what gathers first and what scatters second.
I do not impose a preference, and I do not claim that this is a rule of rhetoric; the order itself is a fact verifiable from the text, the reading of it is mine.
When both the function and the look of a thing are enumerated in the Qurʾān, the two are generally not joined in one sentence; they are named separately. So it is in this sūra:
| Verse | Function | Look / adornment |
|---|---|---|
| 5-6 | Difʾ · manāfiʿ · taʾkulūn | Jamāl (6) |
| 8 | Li-tarkabūhā — to ride | Zīna — adornment |
| 14 | Laḥman ṭariyyā — fresh meat | Ḥilya — ornament |
| 80-81 | Sakanā · buyūtā · taqīkum — shelter and protection | Athāthan wa matāʿan — furnishing and equipment |
The same pattern in all four places: first what works, then what shows. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
And I record this as my own reading: in describing a favour the sūra does not take sufficiency as its measure. An animal could already have been enumerated because it is eaten and carries loads; the verse enumerates the scene of the evening return as well. A sea could have been enumerated because it gives fresh meat; the verse enumerates the ornament as well.
The list, then, does not hold needs alone — it holds what is not needed as well. And part of the force of the ruling lā tuḥṣūhā (you cannot count them) in the eighteenth verse comes from this: the boundary of what is to be counted is not the boundary of staying alive.
The ground of this reading is that twofold structure in four verses; I do not rest it on any transmitted report besides.
The verse records how a society looks at the means of its own livelihood. The animal is named here not only as a unit of production but also as something looked at.
I record this as an observation: there is a difference between measuring a creature solely by what it yields and taking something from the sight of it as well — and by putting the two on the same list the verse does not abolish that difference; on the contrary, it makes it visible.
وَتَحْمِلُ أَثْقَالَكُمْ إِلَىٰ بَلَدٍ لَّمْ تَكُونُوا۟ بَٰلِغِيهِ إِلَّا بِشِقِّ ٱلْأَنفُسِ إِنَّ رَبَّكُمْ لَرَءُوفٌ رَّحِيمٌ
Wa taḥmilu athqālakum ilā baladin lam takūnū bālighīhi illā bi-shiqqi'l-anfus, inna rabbakum la-raʾūfun raḥīm
"And they carry your loads to a land you could not reach save by straining your very selves. Your Lord is truly most kind, most merciful."
The root was treated in full in al-Inshiqāq, and a summary was given at al-Qamar, 54/1. I rely on that treatment. What is needed here from those notes is this:
The concrete sense of the root is to split, to cleave in two. مَشَقَّة (mashaqqa) is hardship — on the lexicographers' explanation, that which splits a man.
The verse does not say "with difficulty". Nor does it use the word mashaqqa. It chooses the most concrete form of the root, and it names the object too: anfus — the selves, their own persons.
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the concreteness of the word: the cost of the journey is pictured not as time or money spent but as a piece torn from the person himself.
| Without the animal | With the animal |
|---|---|
| Lam takūnū bālighīhi — you cannot reach it | Taḥmilu athqālakum — they carry your loads |
| Illā bi-shiqqi'l-anfus — save by splitting your selves | (no cost is named) |
I give this as an observation, and it matters for the sūra's logic of enumeration: some of the items on the list are things given (milk, fruit, shade), and some are costs not paid. The second kind is the harder to notice — for a hardship that is absent is invisible.
| Name | Root | The lexicographers' distinction |
|---|---|---|
| رَءُوف | ر-أ-ف | Tenderness — seeing pain and shrinking from it; finer, more particular |
| رَحِيم | ر-ح-م | Mercy — encompassing, issuing in an effect |
The lexicographers record that raʾfa is sharper and narrower than raḥma; while raḥma can reach the good and the wicked alike. I transmit this distinction as a relation the lexicographers set up, not as a settled ruling.
And that these two names are invoked here is worth recording: the subject of the sentence is a pack animal. The names come after something as everyday as that.
وَٱلْخَيْلَ وَٱلْبِغَالَ وَٱلْحَمِيرَ لِتَرْكَبُوهَا وَزِينَةً وَيَخْلُقُ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
"And horses, mules and donkeys — for you to ride, and as adornment. And He creates what you do not know."
| Purpose | Expression | Form |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Li-tarkabūhā | Lām + verb — for you to ride |
| 2 | Wa zīnatan | A noun in the accusative — as adornment |
The lexicographers dwell on the case of the second word (whether it is a causal object, or governed by an elided verb). But in point of meaning there is no difference, and what must be recorded is this: the work done in the sixth verse with jamāl (beauty) is repeated here with zīna (adornment).
The lexicographers give the difference between the two words thus, and I transmit it: jamāl is beauty residing in the thing itself; zīna is an adornment added, laid over it. In the sixth verse, then, the sight of the animal is named; here, the appearance the animal lends its owner. I give this distinction as a tendency the lexicographers record, not as an absolute rule.
This structure was treated in detail in this commentary, and I rely on it: at Yāsīn, 36/36 (subḥāna'lladhī khalaqa'l-azwāja kullahā mimmā tunbitu'l-arḍu wa min anfusihim wa mimmā lā yaʿlamūn) the following was recorded:
"The third item comes in the same grammatical structure as the first two — the same min, the same mā. It is enumerated as a part of the list, with full standing. But its content is not given." "The verse has deliberately left the third item unfilled. To fill it with the knowledge of any one period breaks the work the verse plainly does — for the moment it is filled, the item ceases to be 'what they do not know'."
And in the Yā Sīn section this verse (al-Naḥl 16/8) was already named. I close the ring from this end.
| Yā Sīn 36/36 | al-Naḥl 16/8 | |
|---|---|---|
| The kind of sentence | Glorification — subḥāna'lladhī | Enumeration — a list of favours |
| Who does not know | Lā yaʿlamūn — third person | Lā taʿlamūn — the one addressed: you |
| What is left open | The third source of the pairs created | The continuation of the mounts created |
| The tense of the verb | Khalaqa — perfect | Wa yakhluqu — imperfect |
The difference of tense is the most important, and I record this as my own reading: in Yā Sīn the creating is named as done and finished; in al-Naḥl, wa yakhluqu — it is still going on. The list is therefore left open here not merely from a want of knowledge but because the work continues.
And the difference of person must be recorded second: in Yā Sīn those who do not know are "they" — a group being described. In al-Naḥl the one who does not know is the addressee himself: "you." The sentence states the limit of the reader's own knowledge.
A note required by the method (Method)
This sentence is one of the places often used for claims of scientific miracle: filling the phrase "things you do not know" with the vehicles known today, with technology, or with some other phenomenon is a widespread interpretation.
This commentary does not take that road, and the reason is the same as the one written in Yāsīn: the moment the item is filled it ceases to be "what you do not know". The force of the sentence comes not from its content but from its having been left empty.
I add this as my own reading, and my ground is the enumeration as a whole: the eighteenth verse will say lā tuḥṣūhā (you cannot count them). The eighth verse shows how that ruling is possible: the list does not close, that it might be counted.
وَعَلَى ٱللَّهِ قَصْدُ ٱلسَّبِيلِ وَمِنْهَا جَآئِرٌ وَلَوْ شَآءَ لَهَدَىٰكُمْ أَجْمَعِينَ
"Upon God rests the pointing of the straight way; and among the ways there is one that swerves. Had He willed He would have guided you all."
It must be recorded: the eighth verse enumerated the mounts, the tenth will enumerate water. A sentence about the way has come in between.
I give this as my own reading; its ground is the position of the verse: where mounts are spoken of it is natural that the road be spoken of; but the verse leaves the physical road and passes over to direction. The enumeration slides from the place to be reached to the bearing to be held. And in the fifteenth verse subul (ways) will come back, this time in the physical sense. The sūra uses the same word on two planes.
The concrete sense of the root: to head straight in one direction; and to be middling, balanced. Qaṣd — heading towards, intent; muqtaṣid — one who holds the middle way; iqtiṣād — moderation. The root occurred at Luqmān, 31/19 (wa'qṣid fī mashyik — be moderate in your walking) and at Luqmān, 31/32 (fa-minhum muqtaṣid).
| Reading | Sense |
|---|---|
| 1 | "The straight one of the ways" — a genitive with the force of an adjective |
| 2 | "The directing towards the way" — with the force of a verbal noun; the act of pointing |
وَمِنْهَا جَآئِرٌ — jāʾir, from the root ج-و-ر: to swerve, to bend aside, to depart from what is right. Jawr — injustice.
And the pronoun must be recorded: minhā — "of them". The verse does not say openly what the pronoun refers to; the lexicographers record that it is the ways, and that this is understood from the word sabīl carrying a plural sense as a generic noun.
The word order of the sentence sets up a balance: the pointing of the straight way rests upon God (wa ʿala'llāh), while the swerving way is named without an agent (wa minhā jāʾir). The one is taken upon Himself; of the other it is only said that it exists.
The same structure will come once more in the sūra, in the thirty-fifth verse (law shāʾa'llāhu mā ʿabadnā min dūnihī min shayʾ) — but there it is the addressees who frame the sentence, and they frame it as an excuse. This is an overlap verifiable within the sūra, and it will be treated at the thirty-fifth verse.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of these two occurrences: the same sentence, once in the mouth of the text and once in the mouth of the addressee. The text says it as a piece of knowledge; the addressee says it as a defence. The difference between them lies not in the truth of the sentence but in who uses it and for what.
هُوَ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَنزَلَ مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مَآءً لَّكُم مِّنْهُ شَرَابٌ وَمِنْهُ شَجَرٌ فِيهِ تُسِيمُونَ · يُنۢبِتُ لَكُم بِهِ ٱلزَّرْعَ وَٱلزَّيْتُونَ وَٱلنَّخِيلَ وَٱلْأَعْنَٰبَ وَمِن كُلِّ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يَتَفَكَّرُونَ
Huwa'lladhī anzala mina'l-samāʾi māʾan, lakum minhu sharābun wa minhu shajarun fīhi tusīmūn · Yunbitu lakum bihi'l-zarʿa wa'l-zaytūna wa'l-nakhīla wa'l-aʿnāba wa min kulli'l-thamarāt, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yatafakkarūn
"It is He who sends down water from the sky: from it you drink, and from it come the trees in which you pasture your beasts. With it He brings forth for you the crops, the olive, the date palm, the vine and fruits of every kind. In that there is a sign for a people who think."
| Share | Expression | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Lakum minhu sharāb | To man — drink |
| 2 | Wa minhu shajarun fīhi tusīmūn | To the animal — pasture |
Worth recording: the verse names man's share first, but it enumerates the animal's share in the same sentence. And both are tied to the same water.
تُسِيمُونَ — root س-و-م: to send an animal out to pasture and let it graze freely. Sāʾima — an animal turned out to pasture, not given fodder. It is recorded that the word occurs in this form only here in the Qurʾān.
I give this as an observation about the word order: in the sixth verse tasraḥūn (you drive them out), here tusīmūn (you pasture them). The two verbs tell of the same act from two different sides: the one, the sight of the driving out; the other, its yield.
| Order | Crop | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | al-Zarʿ | Sown crops — grain, the staple food |
| 2 | al-Zaytūn | The olive — oil |
| 3 | al-Nakhīl | The date palm |
| 4 | al-Aʿnāb | The vine |
| — | Wa min kulli'l-thamarāt | And of fruits of every kind |
The same pattern again: things are enumerated, then the list is left open. The work done in the eighth verse with wa yakhluqu mā lā taʿlamūn is done here with wa min kulli'l-thamarāt. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
نَخِيل وَأَعْنَاب — the pair date palm and vine is named together regularly in the Qurʾān, and this pair was treated at al-Muʾminūn, 23/19; it was recorded there that the two plants are dependent on water in an arid climate and can be stored. The same pair occurred at Yāsīn, 36/34. I rely on those treatments.
And this pair will come back once more in the sūra, in the sixty-seventh verse — this time with the crop in its processed form (tattakhidhūna minhu sakaran wa rizqan ḥasanā). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
From the eleventh verse on, the enumeration is divided into sections by closing sentences, and each closing uses a different verb:
| Verse | Closing | Verb |
|---|---|---|
| 11 | Li-qawmin yatafakkarūn | To think |
| 12 | Li-qawmin yaʿqilūn | To reason |
| 13 | Li-qawmin yadhdhakkarūn | To remember / to take heed |
| 65 | Li-qawmin yasmaʿūn | To hear |
| 67 | Li-qawmin yaʿqilūn | To reason |
| 69 | Li-qawmin yatafakkarūn | To think |
| 79 | Li-qawmin yuʾminūn | To believe |
Seven closings, five distinct verbs. This does the same work as the closings of the wa min āyātihī series tabulated at al-Rūm, 30/20-25 — there four closings addressed four distinct capacities (to think, to know, to hear, to reason). I rely on that treatment and record the difference:
| al-Rūm 30/20-25 | al-Naḥl 16/11-79 | |
|---|---|---|
| What opens the pattern | Wa min āyātihī — a repeated opening | No opening formula — each verse begins differently |
| Number of closings | 4 (inside the series) | 7 (spread across the sūra) |
| The shape of the series | Closed — 20 and 25 frame it | Open — from 11 to 79 |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is how the two sūras use the formula: al-Rūm builds a series and frames it; al-Naḥl scatters its closings through the sūra. In al-Rūm the signs are gathered into a single section; in al-Naḥl they are worked into the weave of the sūra.
وَسَخَّرَ لَكُمُ ٱلَّيْلَ وَٱلنَّهَارَ وَٱلشَّمْسَ وَٱلْقَمَرَ وَٱلنُّجُومُ مُسَخَّرَٰتٌۢ بِأَمْرِهِۦٓ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَٰتٍ لِّقَوْمٍ يَعْقِلُونَ · وَمَا ذَرَأَ لَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُخْتَلِفًا أَلْوَٰنُهُۥٓ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يَذَّكَّرُونَ
Wa sakhkhara lakumu'l-layla wa'l-nahāra wa'l-shamsa wa'l-qamar, wa'l-nujūmu musakhkharātun bi-amrih, inna fī dhālika la-āyātin li-qawmin yaʿqilūn · Wa mā dharaʾa lakum fi'l-arḍi mukhtalifan alwānuh, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yadhdhakkarūn
"He has made the night, the day, the sun and the moon subservient to you; and the stars are made subservient by His command. In that there are signs for a people who reason. · And what He has strewn for you over the earth, of differing colours. In that there is a sign for a people who take heed."
The root has two branches, and the lexicographers record both: to make subservient, to set to a task (taskhīr); and to mock (sukhriyya). The shared idea, on the lexicographers' explanation, is the using of a thing outside its own will.
The root was treated at Luqmān, 31/20 and 31/29 (sakhkhara lakum mā fi'l-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍ); I do not repeat it here.
| Part | Expression | Form |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Sakhkhara lakum al-layla wa'l-nahāra wa'l-shamsa wa'l-qamar | A verbal sentence — with the qualification lakum |
| 2 | Wa'l-nujūmu musakhkharātun bi-amrih | A nominal sentence — no lakum qualification |
The difference is plain and can be verified from the text: the night, the day, the sun and the moon are made subservient "for you". For the stars this qualification is not entered; they are named only as "made subservient by His command".
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the absence of the lakum qualification in the second sentence: the verse does not divide what serves man from what does not — but it does mark off man's share separately. The stars too are within the order; but their order is not reduced to man's service.
And in the sixteenth verse this will be completed: wa bi'l-najmi hum yahtadūn — there the face the star turns towards man will be named. This is a completion verifiable within the sūra.
A note on the variant readings: it is transmitted that in some readings wa'l-nujūmu musakhkharātun is read wa'l-nujūma musakhkharātin — on that reading the clause ceases to be a nominal sentence and attaches to the preceding verb. In point of meaning the difference is that the distinction recorded above falls away. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I state that my reading above rests on the widespread reading.
The concrete sense of the root: to spread as one scatters seed, to distribute by multiplying. Dhurriyya — offspring; the lexicographers record that it is attached to the same root. The root occurred at al-Mulk, 67/24 (huwa'lladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍ).
This construction was treated in detail in this commentary. At Fāṭir, 35/27-28, it occurred three times and was tabulated there:
| Domain | Expression | Where |
|---|---|---|
| Plant | Thamarātin mukhtalifan alwānuhā | Fāṭir 35/27 |
| Stone | Judadun bīḍun wa ḥumrun mukhtalifun alwānuhā | Fāṭir 35/27 |
| Living creature | Mina'l-nāsi wa'l-dawābbi wa'l-anʿāmi mukhtalifun alwānuhū | Fāṭir 35/28 |
| Everything strewn on the earth | Wa mā dharaʾa lakum fi'l-arḍi mukhtalifan alwānuh | al-Naḥl 16/13 |
This is the fourth link, and its difference must be recorded: in Fāṭir the construction was repeated separately for three distinct domains — plant, stone, living creature. In al-Naḥl it is given in a single sentence, with no division: mā dharaʾa lakum fi'l-arḍ — "what He has strewn for you over the earth."
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the scope of the two expressions: Fāṭir enumerates by separating, al-Naḥl by gathering. And there is one further qualification in al-Naḥl's sentence: lakum. In Fāṭir the diversity was a matter for observation; in al-Naḥl it is an item of favour. The same fact, entered in two different columns.
And at al-Rūm, 30/22, the same diversity was treated by way of tongue and colour, and compared there with Fāṭir's list of colours and with al-Ḥujurāt, 49/13. I rely on that treatment and add one further link here.
وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِى سَخَّرَ ٱلْبَحْرَ لِتَأْكُلُوا۟ مِنْهُ لَحْمًا طَرِيًّا وَتَسْتَخْرِجُوا۟ مِنْهُ حِلْيَةً تَلْبَسُونَهَا وَتَرَى ٱلْفُلْكَ مَوَاخِرَ فِيهِ وَلِتَبْتَغُوا۟ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ وَلَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُونَ
Wa huwa'lladhī sakhkhara'l-baḥra li-taʾkulū minhu laḥman ṭariyyan wa tastakhrijū minhu ḥilyatan talbasūnahā, wa tara'l-fulka mawākhira fīhi wa li-tabtaghū min faḍlihī wa laʿallakum tashkurūn
"And it is He who made the sea subservient to you: that you might eat fresh meat from it and bring out of it ornaments to wear. And you see the ships cleaving through it — that you might seek of His bounty, and that you might give thanks."
The first half of this sentence occurred at Fāṭir, 35/12, in almost the same words: wa min kullin taʾkulūna laḥman ṭariyyan wa tastakhrijūna ḥilyatan talbasūnahā. I rely on that treatment.
And what was recorded in the Fāṭir section can be carried over here: the two seas are not equal, yet benefit is drawn from both — the verse named the shared benefit after stating the inequality.
| Fāṭir 35/12 | al-Naḥl 16/14 | |
|---|---|---|
| The work of the sentence | Comparison — wa mā yastawi'l-baḥrān | Enumeration — an item on the list of favours |
| Number of seas | Two — sweet and salt | One — al-baḥr, generic |
| What is added | Wa tara'l-fulka fīhi mawākhir | The word mawākhir is peculiar to al-Naḥl |
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: to cleave the water, to go forward cleaving, and to make a sound in doing so. Makhr — the ship's cleaving of the water; mākhira — that which cleaves.
The picture in the word is worth recording: the verse does not name the ship as "floating" or as "going". It names it as cleaving.
And I give this as an observation: in the seventh verse it was said that man travels by splitting his own self (bi-shiqqi'l-anfus). Here the ship that cleaves the sea is named. What the two verses have in common is the idea of cleaving; but the one takes place in the man himself, the other in the water. I record this not as a claim of kinship between roots — the roots differ (ش-ق-ق and م-خ-ر) — but as a likeness of picture.
| Purpose | Expression | Form |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Li-taʾkulū laḥman ṭariyyā | Lām + verb |
| 2 | Wa tastakhrijū ḥilyatan | Attached to the preceding |
| 3 | Wa li-tabtaghū min faḍlih | Lām + verb — repeated |
| 4 | Wa laʿallakum tashkurūn | Laʿalla — the particle of hope, of purpose |
Worth recording: in the third purpose the lām is repeated. The lexicographers record that this repetition serves to re-establish the connection after the sentence that comes between (wa tara'l-fulka mawākhira fīh).
And the form of the last purpose changes: laʿalla. This sets the fourth item apart from the rest — the first three are outcomes, the fourth the return that is looked for.
The same distinction was treated at al-Rūm, 30/46: the last link of the wa min āyātihī series ended with wa laʿallakum tashkurūn, and it was recorded there — the series is built out of verbs of understanding, and the link that stands apart ends with a verb of response. I rely on that treatment and record that the same structure is found here within a single verse.
وَأَلْقَىٰ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ رَوَٰسِىَ أَن تَمِيدَ بِكُمْ وَأَنْهَٰرًا وَسُبُلًا لَّعَلَّكُمْ تَهْتَدُونَ · وَعَلَٰمَٰتٍ وَبِٱلنَّجْمِ هُمْ يَهْتَدُونَ
Wa alqā fi'l-arḍi rawāsiya an tamīda bikum wa anhāran wa subulan laʿallakum tahtadūn · Wa ʿalāmāt, wa bi'l-najmi hum yahtadūn
"And He cast firm mountains into the earth, lest it sway with you, and rivers and roads — that you might find your way. · And landmarks. And by the star they find their way."
This sentence occurred at Luqmān, 31/10, in exactly the same words, and was treated there. I rely on that treatment. The notes there were these:
- رَوَٰسِى — root ر-س-و: to drop anchor, to be held fast. The root's connection with a ship's anchoring was recorded at Qāf, 50/7.
- أَن تَمِيدَ بِكُمْ — mayd: to sway, to be tossed about. The lexicographers use the word especially of seasickness and of the rolling of a ship.
- And the note required by the method (Method) entered in Luqmān holds here too, and I repeat it: no conclusion about modern geology, about isostasy or about gravitation is drawn from this. The function of the verse is to say that an order visible to the eye stands without any visible support.
The difference that belongs here must be recorded, and the two verses do not stand in the same context:
| Luqmān 31/10 | al-Naḥl 16/15 | |
|---|---|---|
| What precedes the sentence | Khalaqa'l-samāwāti bi-ghayri ʿamadin tarawnahā — pillars you do not see | Sakhkhara'l-baḥr — the sea |
| What follows the sentence | Wa baththa fīhā min kulli dābba — living creatures | Wa anhāran wa subulā — rivers and roads |
| How the block ends | Fa-arūnī mādhā khalaqa'lladhīna min dūnih — a challenge | Laʿallakum tahtadūn — finding one's way |
I record this as my own reading; its ground is how the two blocks close: Luqmān ties the mountains to a challenge — "what have you created?" al-Naḥl ties the same mountains to a sentence about finding one's way. The same fact is thus enumerated in the one as evidence, in the other as a possibility opened.
It must be recorded: in the ninth verse the word sabīl occurred in the sense of a bearing (wa ʿala'llāhi qaṣdu'l-sabīl). Here the same root comes back in the physical sense: subulā — roads.
And in both places the closing is tied to the same root: la-hadākum in the ninth verse, laʿallakum tahtadūn in the fifteenth, hum yahtadūn in the sixteenth. The root ه-د-ي occurs four times in three verses.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and I record this as my own reading: the sūra tells of finding one's way on two planes at once — finding the road across the earth, and finding the straight way. The two planes are named with the same root, and no boundary is set between them.
عَلَٰمَٰت — root ع-ل-م: to know. ʿAlāma — the mark by which a thing is known. That the word comes from the root of knowing is worth recording: a mark is not knowledge itself; it is what leads to knowledge.
The lexicographers dwell on what the ʿalāmāt are here: the mountains, stones, hills and stars that give bearing on a journey. No definite list is given, and I do not give one either.
وَبِٱلنَّجْمِ هُمْ يَهْتَدُونَ — and the wording shifts. The sentence passes into the third person: hum yahtadūn — "they find their way".
Yet the preceding verse was in the second person: laʿallakum tahtadūn — "that you might find your way."
I record this as an observation about the word order: the verse names the finding of one's way by the star not as something commanded of the addressee but as something actually done. What is recorded is that a possibility is in use.
And the word is singular: bi'l-najm. The lexicographers take it as a generic noun — not "by the star" but "by the stars". But another reason for its coming in the singular is transmitted: a pointing to one particular star used in finding direction. Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.
And a ring closes with the twelfth verse: there the stars were named as musakhkharātun bi-amrih, and no qualification belonging to man was entered. Here that qualification comes. This is a completion verifiable within the sūra.
أَفَمَن يَخْلُقُ كَمَن لَّا يَخْلُقُ أَفَلَا تَذَكَّرُونَ · وَإِن تَعُدُّوا۟ نِعْمَةَ ٱللَّهِ لَا تُحْصُوهَآ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَغَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
A-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq, a-fa-lā tadhakkarūn · Wa in taʿuddū niʿmata'llāhi lā tuḥṣūhā, inna'llāha la-ghafūrun raḥīm
"Is He who creates like one who does not create? Will you still not take heed? · If you set out to count God's favour you could not count it. God is truly most forgiving, most merciful."
The question ties the whole list to a single comparison. A-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq — and the verb is imperfect: "the one who is creating" set against "the one who does not create".
I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence uses no name. It says neither "God" nor gives the other side a name. There is only a verb and its negative. The comparison is thus built not on identities but on the work done.
And the word man must be recorded: in Arabic man is used of beings possessed of reason. The sentence therefore puts its question counting the other side as persons — on the most favourable terms available to them. Even so the outcome does not change.
This is one of the most striking sentences in the sūra, and it comes directly after a full enumeration.
The difference between the two verbs carries the whole weight of the sentence, and the lexicographers dwell on it:
| Verb | Root | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| تَعُدُّوا۟ | ع-د-د | To count — to name one by one, to make an inventory |
| تُحْصُوا۟ | ح-ص-ي | To reckon up (iḥṣāʾ) — to grasp the number exactly, to exhaust it, to enter it on record |
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root ح-ص-ي thus: ḥaṣā — a pebble. In the old manner of counting one counted with pebbles; from this comes the sense "a complete count, an exhaustive inventory". The word occurred at al-Jinn, 72/28 (wa aḥṣā kulla shayʾin ʿadadā) and at Maryam, 19/94 (laqad aḥṣāhum wa ʿaddahum ʿaddā — the two verbs side by side).
The difference must be recorded, and the meaning of the verse rests on it: in saying "you cannot count them" the verse does not say that counting cannot be begun. It says: if you set about counting (in taʿuddū), you cannot finish (lā tuḥṣūhā).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that two distinct verbs were chosen: the verb of the conditional clause is taʿuddū, the verb of the answering clause tuḥṣū. Had the verse forbidden counting altogether it could have used both verbs from the same root. That it keeps the distinction shows that it does not annul the act of counting itself.
And this has a direct consequence for the sūra: the sūra has in fact been counting for thirteen verses. The verse therefore halts at a point the very work it has been doing, but does not cancel it.
The lexicographers explain it as a generic noun: it conveys not number but kind. And I give this as an observation: to say of a singular word that it cannot be counted raises the tension of the sentence — not even a single thing can be counted.
And the sūra will use this word insistently: the construction niʿmata'llāh occurs five times in the sūra (18, 53, 71, 72, 83), and once more in the form niʿmatahū (81). This is a countable fact within the sūra and will be tabulated at the end.
The expected closing would have been a sentence about thanks, or a rebuke. The verse names forgiveness.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two sentences stand back to back: the return for a favour that cannot be counted cannot itself be rendered in full. Instead of saying that the return cannot be made, the verse says that the failure to make it is forgiven. The sentence closes, within the same verse, the account it opened.
وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ مَا تُسِرُّونَ وَمَا تُعْلِنُونَ · وَٱلَّذِينَ يَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ لَا يَخْلُقُونَ شَيْـًٔا وَهُمْ يُخْلَقُونَ · أَمْوَٰتٌ غَيْرُ أَحْيَآءٍ وَمَا يَشْعُرُونَ أَيَّانَ يُبْعَثُونَ
Wa'llāhu yaʿlamu mā tusirrūna wa mā tuʿlinūn · Wa'lladhīna yadʿūna min dūni'llāhi lā yakhluqūna shayʾan wa hum yukhlaqūn · Amwātun ghayru aḥyāʾ, wa mā yashʿurūna ayyāna yubʿathūn
"And God knows what you conceal and what you make known. · And those they call upon besides God create nothing; they themselves are created. · They are dead, not living; nor do they know when they will be raised."
The seventeenth verse had asked: a-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq. The twentieth gives the answer, and in giving it uses the same root.
| Verse | Expression | Form |
|---|---|---|
| 17 | A-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq | A question — active verb, two sides |
| 20 | Lā yakhluqūna shayʾan wa hum yukhlaqūn | The answer — active and passive side by side |
The construction of the answer must be recorded: the verse does not say only "they cannot create". It turns the same root into the passive and adds: wa hum yukhlaqūn — "they themselves are created."
I give this as an observation about the word order: the position claimed and the position in fact are set against each other by the two voices of a single root. The other side is found in exactly the reverse form of its own claim.
The lexicographers count additions of this kind as taʾkīd (emphasis). But one further explanation belonging here must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: in Arabic mawt is used also of what has never lived — an inanimate object is mayyit too. The qualification ghayru aḥyāʾ marks off this second sense: what is at issue is not a thing that has died but a thing that has never been alive.
And at Fāṭir, 35/13-14, the same subject was closed off in three stages (they do not hear → were they to hear they could not answer → in the end they reject). I rely on that treatment and record the difference here: Fāṭir was treating the impossibility of communication; al-Naḥl, the character of existence.
وَمَا يَشْعُرُونَ أَيَّانَ يُبْعَثُونَ — and the pronoun must be recorded. Yubʿathūn — when "they will be raised". The sentence thus says that the objects called upon are themselves inside a process of being raised.
The lexicographers give the reference of the pronoun in two ways: either those called upon, or those who call. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.
إِلَٰهُكُمْ إِلَٰهٌ وَٰحِدٌ فَٱلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ قُلُوبُهُم مُّنكِرَةٌ وَهُم مُّسْتَكْبِرُونَ · لَا جَرَمَ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَعْلَمُ مَا يُسِرُّونَ وَمَا يُعْلِنُونَ إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُسْتَكْبِرِينَ
Ilāhukum ilāhun wāḥid, fa'lladhīna lā yuʾminūna bi'l-ākhirati qulūbuhum munkiratun wa hum mustakbirūn · Lā jarama anna'llāha yaʿlamu mā yusirrūna wa mā yuʿlinūn, innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-mustakbirīn
"Your god is one god. As for those who do not believe in the hereafter, their hearts are in denial and they make themselves great. · Beyond doubt God knows what they conceal and what they make known. He does not love those who make themselves great."
| Expression | Where | What |
|---|---|---|
| Qulūbuhum munkira | Within | A heart that does not accept |
| Wa hum mustakbirūn | Without | The conduct of self-magnifying |
And the order of the two clauses must be recorded: first the heart, then the conduct. The verse ranks conduct as an outcome of the heart.
I give this as an observation, and its ground is the order of the clauses: the verse does not name denial as a want of knowledge. Both diagnoses have to do not with knowledge but with disposition.
Lā jarama occurs in five places in the Qurʾān, and the lexicographers differ over the origin of the form.
| View | How lā jarama is built |
|---|---|
| 1 | The negative lā + jarama (to cut) — "certain, unavoidable" |
| 2 | A frozen formula of oath or emphasis — "beyond doubt, assuredly" |
| 3 | A statement of necessity, like lā budda |
And this construction will occur twice in the sūra: here and in the sixty-second verse (lā jarama anna lahumu'l-nār). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
It must be recorded: the sentence yaʿlamu mā tusirrūna wa mā tuʿlinūn occurred in the nineteenth verse. In the twenty-third it returns in almost the same words — the only difference being the change of person:
| Verse | Expression | Person |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | Mā tusirrūna wa mā tuʿlinūn | Second person — you |
| 23 | Mā yusirrūna wa mā yuʿlinūn | Third person — they |
This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: the same sentence is said first to the general addressee, then to a particular group. The ruling is laid down first for everyone, then applied to those who hold a certain stance.
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُم مَّاذَآ أَنزَلَ رَبُّكُمْ قَالُوٓا۟ أَسَٰطِيرُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · لِيَحْمِلُوٓا۟ أَوْزَارَهُمْ كَامِلَةً يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ وَمِنْ أَوْزَارِ ٱلَّذِينَ يُضِلُّونَهُم بِغَيْرِ عِلْمٍ أَلَا سَآءَ مَا يَزِرُونَ
Wa idhā qīla lahum mādhā anzala rabbukum qālū asāṭīru'l-awwalīn · Li-yaḥmilū awzārahum kāmilatan yawma'l-qiyāmati wa min awzāri'lladhīna yuḍillūnahum bi-ghayri ʿilm, alā sāʾa mā yazirūn
"And when it is said to them, "What has your Lord sent down?", they say: "Tales of the ancients." · So that on the Day of Resurrection they may carry their own burdens in full, and a part of the burdens of those they lead astray without knowledge. Beware — evil is what they take upon themselves!"
The answer, however, does not answer the question. Asāṭīru'l-awwalīn — "tales of the ancients." What is given is not an account of what was sent down but a verdict on where it came from.
I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence does not even say "nothing was sent down". It accepts the question and changes its object. And in the thirtieth verse the same question will be put once more, this time to another group — and the answer will be wholly different. The sūra gives the same question to two different mouths. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
أَسَٰطِير — the plural of usṭūra, root س-ط-ر: a line, writing, to set out in rows. Misṭar — the instrument used for ruling lines. The word means "a thing written, set out in lines"; from this comes the sense "old story, tale".
There is an irony in the root of the word, and I record this as an observation about the language: the objection names what has been sent down "a thing written". Yet the subject of the objection is a text that has been sent down. Both sides use the same family of words; where they part is over the source of the text.
There is a matter here that must be handled with care, because at first sight the verse appears to contradict a principle recorded many times over in this commentary.
The principle is this, and it was treated at many places: wa lā taziru wāziratun wizra ukhrā — "no bearer of burdens bears the burden of another." It was treated in detail at Fāṭir, 35/18, and at al-Isrāʾ, 17/15.
This verse, however, says that those who lead others astray will carry a part of the burdens of those they lead astray. How is the contradiction resolved?
| Word | What it does |
|---|---|
| Awzārahum + كَامِلَةً | Their own burdens — in full. Their own share is not diminished at all |
| Wa min awzāri'lladhīna yuḍillūnahum | Min — "a part of". Not the whole |
And the burden of those led astray is not lightened: the verse does not say that their burden is taken away. What it says is that the one who leads astray is loaded in addition, as a consequence of his own act.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is these two words (kāmilatan and min): what is carried is not another's burden — it is the return for the act of leading astray itself. The principle is thus not broken; leading astray is counted as an act in its own right.
And the qualification bi-ghayri ʿilm is worth recording: the leading astray is described as done without knowledge. The same construction occurred at Luqmān, 31/6 (li-yuḍilla ʿan sabīli'llāhi bi-ghayri ʿilm); I rely on that treatment.
قَدْ مَكَرَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ فَأَتَى ٱللَّهُ بُنْيَٰنَهُم مِّنَ ٱلْقَوَاعِدِ فَخَرَّ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلسَّقْفُ مِن فَوْقِهِمْ وَأَتَىٰهُمُ ٱلْعَذَابُ مِنْ حَيْثُ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ · ثُمَّ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ يُخْزِيهِمْ وَيَقُولُ أَيْنَ شُرَكَآءِىَ ٱلَّذِينَ كُنتُمْ تُشَٰٓقُّونَ فِيهِمْ
Qad makara'lladhīna min qablihim fa-ata'llāhu bunyānahum mina'l-qawāʿidi fa-kharra ʿalayhimu'l-saqfu min fawqihim wa atāhumu'l-ʿadhābu min ḥaythu lā yashʿurūn · Thumma yawma'l-qiyāmati yukhzīhim wa yaqūlu ayna shurakāʾiya'lladhīna kuntum tushāqqūna fīhim
"Those before them plotted too; God came at their building from the foundations, and the roof fell in upon them from above, and the punishment came at them from where they did not perceive it. · Then on the Day of Resurrection He will disgrace them and say: 'Where are My associates, over whom you took the opposing side?'"
| Verb | Direction | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| Fa-atā … mina'l-qawāʿid | From below | From the foundations |
| Fa-kharra ʿalayhimu'l-saqfu min fawqihim | From above | The roof upon their heads |
| Wa atāhumu'l-ʿadhābu min ḥaythu lā yashʿurūn | From where it was not reckoned | Left unnamed |
I record this as an observation about the word order: unlike the first two, the third direction is not a place. The verse leaves one direction unclosed — and that direction is the one the plot could not take into account.
بُنْيَٰن and قَوَاعِد — bunyān, root ب-ن-ي: a building. Qawāʿid, the plural of qāʿida, root ق-ع-د: that which sits, that which is set down; a foundation. That the word comes from the verb "to sit" is worth recording: the foundation is where the building sits upon the ground.
مَكَرَ — root م-ك-ر: the core the lexicographers give is to work at something in secret and by indirect means. The root was treated in detail at al-Naml, 27/50-51 (wa makarū makran wa makarnā makran); I rely on that treatment.
The verb is Form III from the root ش-ق-ق: mushāqqa — to stand on opposite sides of one another, to set up an opposing front.
The picture in the root must be recorded, and it was analysed in al-Inshiqāq: shiqq — one of the two pieces into which a thing is split. So mushāqqa means "to stand in the other half".
And it must be recorded that this is the root's second occurrence in the sūra: bi-shiqqi'l-anfus (the splitting of the selves) occurred in the seventh verse. Both occurrences carry the picture of splitting; the one in the body, the other in the ranks. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
ٱلَّذِينَ تَتَوَفَّىٰهُمُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ ظَالِمِىٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ فَأَلْقَوُا۟ ٱلسَّلَمَ مَا كُنَّا نَعْمَلُ مِن سُوٓءٍۭ بَلَىٰٓ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَلِيمٌۢ بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَعْمَلُونَ · فَٱدْخُلُوٓا۟ أَبْوَٰبَ جَهَنَّمَ خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَا فَلَبِئْسَ مَثْوَى ٱلْمُتَكَبِّرِينَ
Alladhīna tatawaffāhumu'l-malāʾikatu ẓālimī anfusihim, fa-alqawu'l-salama mā kunnā naʿmalu min sūʾ, balā inna'llāha ʿalīmun bimā kuntum taʿmalūn · Fa'dkhulū abwāba jahannama khālidīna fīhā, fa-la-biʾsa mathwa'l-mutakabbirīn
"Those whom the angels take while they are wronging themselves surrender: 'We were doing no evil.' No indeed! God knows what you were doing. · So enter the gates of Hell, to remain in them. Evil is the abode of those who make themselves great!"
To cast down the salam — to lay surrender out in the open, to give oneself up. Root س-ل-م: to be sound, to be without flaw, to surrender.
And the choice of verb is worth recording: alqaw — "they cast, they threw down". The same verb was used of the mountains in the fifteenth verse (wa alqā fi'l-arḍi rawāsiya). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra; but the agent changes between the two uses: there it is God who casts, here it is man who throws down.
مَا كُنَّا نَعْمَلُ مِن سُوٓءٍ — and even after the surrender a defence follows. The order of the sentence must be recorded: first the surrender, then the denial. The two movements do not normally stand together.
I give this as an observation: the verse shows that surrender is not acceptance — even when the resistance is over, the defence continues.
And the answer is a single word: balā — "no, it is not so". In Arabic balā is a particle used specifically to refute a negative sentence; naʿam (yes) would have confirmed the negation. The claim is refuted in one syllable.
مَثْوَى — root ث-و-ي: to stay in a place, to lodge. Mathwā — the place where one stays. The word occurred at Muḥammad, 47/12 (wa'l-nāru mathwan lahum).
وَقِيلَ لِلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوْا۟ مَاذَآ أَنزَلَ رَبُّكُمْ قَالُوا۟ خَيْرًا لِّلَّذِينَ أَحْسَنُوا۟ فِى هَٰذِهِ ٱلدُّنْيَا حَسَنَةٌ وَلَدَارُ ٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ خَيْرٌ وَلَنِعْمَ دَارُ ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ · جَنَّٰتُ عَدْنٍ يَدْخُلُونَهَا تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ لَهُمْ فِيهَا مَا يَشَآءُونَ · ٱلَّذِينَ تَتَوَفَّىٰهُمُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ طَيِّبِينَ يَقُولُونَ سَلَٰمٌ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱدْخُلُوا۟ ٱلْجَنَّةَ بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَعْمَلُونَ
Wa qīla lilladhīna'ttaqaw mādhā anzala rabbukum qālū khayrā, lilladhīna aḥsanū fī hādhihi'l-dunyā ḥasana, wa la-dāru'l-ākhirati khayr, wa la-niʿma dāru'l-muttaqīn · Jannātu ʿadnin yadkhulūnahā tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhāru lahum fīhā mā yashāʾūn · Alladhīna tatawaffāhumu'l-malāʾikatu ṭayyibīna yaqūlūna salāmun ʿalaykumu'dkhulu'l-jannata bimā kuntum taʿmalūn
"And when it is said to those who guard themselves, "What has your Lord sent down?", they say: "Good." For those who do good in this world there is good; and the abode of the hereafter is better. How excellent is the abode of those who guard themselves! · Gardens of ʿAdn which they enter, with rivers running beneath them; there they have whatever they wish. · Those whom the angels take while they are pure, saying: "Peace be upon you! Enter the Garden for what you were doing.""
| Verse 24 | Verse 30 | |
|---|---|---|
| The question | Mādhā anzala rabbukum | The same question, word for word |
| To whom it is put | Lahum — unnamed | Lilladhīna'ttaqaw — to those who guard themselves |
| The answer | Asāṭīru'l-awwalīn — tales of the ancients | Khayrā — good |
| The kind of answer | A verdict on the source | A verdict on the content |
| The length of the answer | Two words | One word |
This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: both answers are short, but they answer different things. The first answers the question "who sent it down" — though that was not the question asked. The second answers the question that was asked, "what has He sent down": khayrā — good.
The difference is thus given, before any difference of belief, as a difference in hearing the question.
And the sūra builds one further symmetry. The twenty-eighth and thirty-second verses begin with the same sentence:
| Verse 28 | Verse 32 | |
|---|---|---|
| The opening | Alladhīna tatawaffāhumu'l-malāʾika | The same |
| The note of state | Ẓālimī anfusihim — wronging themselves | Ṭayyibīn — pure |
| Who speaks first | The dying — mā kunnā naʿmalu min sūʾ | The angels — salāmun ʿalaykum |
| The command | Fa'dkhulū abwāba jahannam | Udkhulu'l-janna |
| The ground given | (none is given) | Bimā kuntum taʿmalūn |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the third line: in the first scene it is the dying who speak first — and what they say is a defence. In the second it is the angel who speaks first — and what he says is a greeting of peace. Who speaks first determines the whole of the scene.
طَيِّبِين — root ط-ي-ب: pleasant, clean, agreeable to the heart. The root was treated at al-Ṣaff, 61/12, where it was recorded that the word is used of food, of speech and of life; I rely on that treatment. And the word will occur once more in the sūra, in the seventy-second verse, of provisions (wa razaqakum mina'l-ṭayyibāt).
عَدْن — root ع-د-ن: to stay on in a place, to settle. Maʿdan — the place where a substance lies settled; from the same root. So jannātu ʿadn means "the gardens where one stays".
هَلْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَّآ أَن تَأْتِيَهُمُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ أَوْ يَأْتِىَ أَمْرُ رَبِّكَ كَذَٰلِكَ فَعَلَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ وَمَا ظَلَمَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ وَلَٰكِن كَانُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ يَظْلِمُونَ · فَأَصَابَهُمْ سَيِّـَٔاتُ مَا عَمِلُوا۟ وَحَاقَ بِهِم مَّا كَانُوا۟ بِهِۦ يَسْتَهْزِءُونَ
Hal yanẓurūna illā an taʾtiyahumu'l-malāʾikatu aw yaʾtiya amru rabbik, ka-dhālika faʿala'lladhīna min qablihim, wa mā ẓalamahumu'llāhu wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn · Fa-aṣābahum sayyiʾātu mā ʿamilū wa ḥāqa bihim mā kānū bihī yastahziʾūn
"Do they look for anything but that the angels should come to them, or that the command of your Lord should come? Those before them did the same. God did not wrong them; it was themselves they were wronging. · The evils of what they had done struck them, and the very thing they mocked closed in around them."
It must be recorded: the construction amru rabbik is the same as the amru'llāh of the sūra's first verse.
The first verse had said: atā amru'llāhi fa-lā tastaʿjilūh — "it has come; do not seek to hasten it." The thirty-third says: aw yaʾtiya amru rabbik — "or that the command of your Lord should come."
| Verse | Verb | Mood | Who is speaking |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Atā | Perfect | The text — a declaration of certainty |
| 33 | Yaʾtiya | Imperfect (subjunctive) | The text — describing what they wait for |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and I record this as my own reading: what the first verse forbade them to hasten is named in the thirty-third as the one thing they wait for. The sūra thus explains, thirty-two verses later, why that prohibition was laid down: if no other sign is accepted, that is all that remains.
هَلْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَّآ — naẓar here has the sense of waiting for. And the restriction built with illā must be recorded: the verse does not say "this is what they wait for"; it says "they wait for nothing but this."
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: a thing turning back and coming down upon its owner, closing around him. Ḥāqa bihī — it befell him, it wrapped itself about him. In the Qurʾān the word occurs almost everywhere together with mockery or with plotting.
And the construction of the sentence is worth recording: ḥāqa bihim mā kānū bihī yastahziʾūn — what closes in on them is the very thing they mocked. The punishment is not fetched from outside; the thing mocked comes back.
The same sentence is repeated at several places in the Qurʾān and was treated in this commentary: the root was analysed at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), 40/45, and the same point of word order was recorded at al-Zumar, 39/48, and at al-Anbiyāʾ, 21/41. I rely on those treatments.
وَقَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ أَشْرَكُوا۟ لَوْ شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ مَا عَبَدْنَا مِن دُونِهِۦ مِن شَىْءٍ نَّحْنُ وَلَآ ءَابَآؤُنَا وَلَا حَرَّمْنَا مِن دُونِهِۦ مِن شَىْءٍ كَذَٰلِكَ فَعَلَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ فَهَلْ عَلَى ٱلرُّسُلِ إِلَّا ٱلْبَلَٰغُ ٱلْمُبِينُ
Wa qāla'lladhīna ashrakū law shāʾa'llāhu mā ʿabadnā min dūnihī min shayʾin naḥnu wa lā ābāʾunā wa lā ḥarramnā min dūnihī min shayʾ, ka-dhālika faʿala'lladhīna min qablihim, fa-hal ʿala'l-rusuli illa'l-balāghu'l-mubīn
"Those who associate said: 'Had God willed, neither we nor our fathers would have served anything besides Him, nor would we have forbidden anything without Him.' Those before them did the same. Is anything laid upon the messengers but plain delivery?"
In the ninth verse the text had said: wa law shāʾa la-hadākum ajmaʿīn — "had He willed He would have guided you all."
In the thirty-fifth the same sentence, in the same form, comes from the mouth of the addressee: law shāʾa'llāhu mā ʿabadnā min dūnihī min shayʾ.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and it was pointed to at the ninth verse. The comparison can now be made:
| Verse 9 | Verse 35 | |
|---|---|---|
| Who says it | The text | Those who associate |
| The form | Law shāʾa la-hadākum | Law shāʾa'llāhu mā ʿabadnā |
| Its direction | Positive — guidance could have been given | Negative — we would not have served |
| Its work | A piece of knowledge | A defence |
| What comes after it | The enumeration continues | Fa-hal ʿala'l-rusuli illa'l-balāgh |
The answer is this: fa-hal ʿala'l-rusuli illa'l-balāghu'l-mubīn — "is anything laid upon the messengers but plain delivery?"
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the answer itself: the verse does not say that the sentence "had God willed" is untrue — indeed it said something like it itself in the ninth verse. What it says is that the sentence cannot be used as a means of unloading responsibility.
The same defence occurs word for word at al-Zukhruf, 43/20 (law shāʾa'l-raḥmānu mā ʿabadnāhum) and was treated there: it was recorded that the claim is framed without knowledge (in hum illā yakhruṣūn). I rely on that treatment.
This construction was treated at many places in this commentary: at al-Aḥqāf, 46/35 (balāgh), at Fāṭir, 35/19-23, at al-Zumar, 39/41 (wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-wakīl), at al-Rūm, 30/52-53. I do not repeat it here.
What belongs here is that the construction has a second occurrence in the sūra: it will come once more in the eighty-second verse (fa-innamā ʿalayka'l-balāghu'l-mubīn). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and both stand immediately after an objection.
وَلَقَدْ بَعَثْنَا فِى كُلِّ أُمَّةٍ رَّسُولًا أَنِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱجْتَنِبُوا۟ ٱلطَّٰغُوتَ فَمِنْهُم مَّنْ هَدَى ٱللَّهُ وَمِنْهُم مَّنْ حَقَّتْ عَلَيْهِ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةُ فَسِيرُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ فَٱنظُرُوا۟ كَيْفَ كَانَ عَٰقِبَةُ ٱلْمُكَذِّبِينَ
Wa laqad baʿathnā fī kulli ummatin rasūlan ani'budu'llāha wa'jtanibu'l-ṭāghūt, fa-minhum man hada'llāhu wa minhum man ḥaqqat ʿalayhi'l-ḍalāla, fa-sīrū fi'l-arḍi fa'nẓurū kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mukadhdhibīn
"We have surely raised up in every community a messenger: 'Serve God, and keep clear of the ṭāghūt.' Among them were some whom God guided, and some upon whom error was fixed. So travel through the earth and see what became of those who cried lies."
| Command | Form | Its direction |
|---|---|---|
| Uʿbudu'llāh | Imperative — do | Positive |
| Ijtanibu'l-ṭāghūt | Imperative — Form VIII, ijtināb | Keep clear of |
اجْتَنِبُوا۟ — root ج-ن-ب: side, flank. Janb — the flank; jānib — the side. In Form VIII (ijtanaba) it means "not to take a thing to one's side, to draw away from it".
The picture in the word is worth recording, and I give this as an observation about the language: the verse does not say "tear it down" or "reject it". It says "keep it away from your side." The command is thus not a command to destroy but a command about distance.
طَٰغُوت — root ط-غ-ي: to overstep the bound, to overflow. Ṭughyān — excess; ṭāghī — one who oversteps. Ṭāghūt is intensive in form, and the lexicographers record that the word is used for both singular and plural. The root was treated at al-Ḥāqqa, 69/5 (fa-uhlikū bi'l-ṭāghiya) and at al-Nāziʿāt, 79/17 (innahū ṭaghā).
It must be recorded: the verse gives a second answer to the defence of the thirty-fifth verse, and this answer is historical.
The defence was: "had God willed we would not have served them." The answer: to every community a messenger was sent.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses stand back to back: the verse does not debate the existence of the will as a theory. It announces as a fact that the knowledge was delivered. And the principle recorded at al-Isrāʾ, 17/15, is stated here from the other side: there it was wa mā kunnā muʿadhdhibīna ḥattā nabʿatha rasūlā (We do not punish until We have raised up a messenger); here it is announced that the messenger has been sent. The same principle was recorded at al-Qaṣaṣ, 28/59.
فَسِيرُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ — this proof was treated at many places in this commentary: al-Rūm 30/9 and 30/42, Fāṭir 35/44, Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/21 and 40/82, Muḥammad 47/10. I do not repeat it here. And what was recorded there holds here too: the proof is fetched not from a distant history but from the ruins that lie along the road.
إِن تَحْرِصْ عَلَىٰ هُدَىٰهُمْ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَهْدِى مَن يُضِلُّ وَمَا لَهُم مِّن نَّٰصِرِينَ · وَأَقْسَمُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ جَهْدَ أَيْمَٰنِهِمْ لَا يَبْعَثُ ٱللَّهُ مَن يَمُوتُ بَلَىٰ وَعْدًا عَلَيْهِ حَقًّا وَلَٰكِنَّ أَكْثَرَ ٱلنَّاسِ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ · لِيُبَيِّنَ لَهُمُ ٱلَّذِى يَخْتَلِفُونَ فِيهِ وَلِيَعْلَمَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوٓا۟ أَنَّهُمْ كَانُوا۟ كَٰذِبِينَ
In taḥriṣ ʿalā hudāhum fa-inna'llāha lā yahdī man yuḍillu wa mā lahum min nāṣirīn · Wa aqsamū bi'llāhi jahda aymānihim lā yabʿathu'llāhu man yamūt, balā waʿdan ʿalayhi ḥaqqan wa lākinna akthara'l-nāsi lā yaʿlamūn · Li-yubayyina lahumu'lladhī yakhtalifūna fīhi wa li-yaʿlama'lladhīna kafarū annahum kānū kādhibīn
"However eager you are for their guidance, God does not guide the one He lets go astray; and they have no helpers. · They swore by God with the utmost of their oaths: 'God will not raise up one who dies.' No indeed! It is a promise binding upon Him, in truth — but most people do not know. · That He may make clear to them that over which they differ, and that those who disbelieved may know that they were liars."
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: to be excessively eager to obtain a thing; and ḥarasa'l-thawb — to rub a cloth too hard in the washing and so wear it out.
This second picture is worth recording, and I give it as an observation about the language: in the root there is the idea that an excess of wanting does damage. And this is exactly what the verse says: eagerness does not change the outcome. The same line was treated at Fāṭir, 35/8 (fa-lā tadhhab nafsuka ʿalayhim ḥasarāt); I rely on that treatment.
Jahda aymānihim — "with the utmost force of their oaths". Root ج-ه-د: to spend strength, to go to the end of one's capacity. The root was treated at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/6 and 29/69; I rely on that treatment.
The construction occurs in several places in the Qurʾān, and the same form was present at Fāṭir, 35/42.
And the work it does here must be recorded: what is sworn to is a denial — lā yabʿathu'llāhu man yamūt. A form of affirmation of the highest degree is thus used to prop up a negation.
I give this as an observation: the verse shows that the direction of certainty can change. The same word (balā) refuted a denial in the twenty-eighth verse as well; here it refutes an oath.
The thirty-ninth verse says why the raising takes place, and the ground it gives is worth recording:
| Purpose | Expression | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Li-yubayyina lahumu'lladhī yakhtalifūna fīh | To those who differ — a making clear |
| 2 | Wa li-yaʿlama'lladhīna kafarū annahum kānū kādhibīn | To those who disbelieved — knowledge of their own condition |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word of the first purpose: the verse names the raising first of all not as punishment but as tabyīn — a making clear. The ending of the disagreement is counted as the first work of the scene.
The root ب-ي-ن is one of the sūra's backbones and we shall return to it in the verses ahead: li-tubayyina li'l-nās in the forty-fourth verse, tibyānan li-kulli shayʾ in the eighty-ninth. All three occurrences can be verified from the text.
إِنَّمَا قَوْلُنَا لِشَىْءٍ إِذَآ أَرَدْنَٰهُ أَن نَّقُولَ لَهُۥ كُن فَيَكُونُ
The verse is the last answer to the denial of the thirty-eighth verse (lā yabʿathu'llāhu man yamūt). And the answer is not a proof but a description.
| Part | What it does |
|---|---|
| Innamā | Restriction (ḥaṣr) — "only, no more than" |
| Qawlunā li-shayʾin idhā aradnāh | The condition: the will first |
| An naqūla lahū kun | A single word |
| Fa-yakūn | The outcome — from the same root |
And what draws the attention is that there is no intermediary at all between kun and yakūn: fa — immediately after.
The form occurs in eight places in the Qurʾān and was treated in detail in this commentary at Yāsīn, 36/82 (innamā amruhū idhā arāda shayʾan an yaqūla lahū kun fa-yakūn). I rely on that treatment.
The difference that belongs here must be recorded, and the wording of the two verses parts at one point:
| Yā Sīn 36/82 | al-Naḥl 16/40 | |
|---|---|---|
| The key word | Innamā amruhū — His command | Innamā qawlunā — Our word |
| Person | Third — amruhū, arāda | First person plural — qawlunā, aradnā |
| Its place in the sūra | Among the last verses — a closing | The end of a block — a transition |
And one further note: amru'llāh occurred in the first verse. In the fortieth the same idea is given with the word qawl. This is an overlap verifiable within the sūra.
A note on the variant readings: it is transmitted that in some readings fa-yakūn is read fa-yakūna (subjunctive); on that reading the clause is coordinated with an naqūla. It is recorded that there is no essential change in meaning.
وَٱلَّذِينَ هَاجَرُوا۟ فِى ٱللَّهِ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا ظُلِمُوا۟ لَنُبَوِّئَنَّهُمْ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا حَسَنَةً وَلَأَجْرُ ٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ أَكْبَرُ لَوْ كَانُوا۟ يَعْلَمُونَ · ٱلَّذِينَ صَبَرُوا۟ وَعَلَىٰ رَبِّهِمْ يَتَوَكَّلُونَ
Wa'lladhīna hājarū fi'llāhi min baʿdi mā ẓulimū la-nubawwiʾannahum fi'l-dunyā ḥasana, wa la-ajru'l-ākhirati akbar, law kānū yaʿlamūn · Alladhīna ṣabarū wa ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn
"Those who emigrated for God's sake after they had been wronged — We shall surely settle them well in this world; and the reward of the hereafter is greater, if only they knew. · They are those who were patient and who rely upon their Lord."
The concrete sense of the root: to part from, to abandon, to cut a tie. Hajr — abandonment; hijra — departure from one's homeland. That it comes from Form III (hājara) is worth recording: this form conveys reciprocity, and the lexicographers record here the sense that while a man leaves a thing, the thing leaves him as well.
And the qualification is important: min baʿdi mā ẓulimū — "after they had been wronged". The departure is thus named not as a choice but as a consequence.
لَنُبَوِّئَنَّهُمْ — root ب-و-أ: to settle in a place, to give a position. Mubawwaʾ — the place in which one is settled. The lām at the head of the verb and the nūn at its end (the nūn of emphasis) must be recorded: the sentence is reinforced twice over.
And the same verb occurred in the same form at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/58 (la-nubawwiʾannahum mina'l-jannati ghurafā), and there too it was followed by alladhīna ṣabarū wa ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn. The two verses are almost identical in structure, and this is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
| al-ʿAnkabūt 29/58-59 | al-Naḥl 16/41-42 | |
|---|---|---|
| Where they are settled | Mina'l-jannati ghurafā — chambers in the Garden | Fi'l-dunyā ḥasana — in this world |
| The note about the hereafter | The Garden is already what is described | Wa la-ajru'l-ākhirati akbar — added separately |
| The shared closing sentence | Alladhīna ṣabarū wa ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn | The same |
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the difference between the two verses: al-Naḥl begins by giving the return in this world and adds the hereafter separately. The cost of the emigration is thus not tied to a deferred return alone.
وَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَا مِن قَبْلِكَ إِلَّا رِجَالًا نُّوحِىٓ إِلَيْهِمْ فَسْـَٔلُوٓا۟ أَهْلَ ٱلذِّكْرِ إِن كُنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ · بِٱلْبَيِّنَٰتِ وَٱلزُّبُرِ وَأَنزَلْنَآ إِلَيْكَ ٱلذِّكْرَ لِتُبَيِّنَ لِلنَّاسِ مَا نُزِّلَ إِلَيْهِمْ وَلَعَلَّهُمْ يَتَفَكَّرُونَ
Wa mā arsalnā min qablika illā rijālan nūḥī ilayhim fa'sʾalū ahla'l-dhikri in kuntum lā taʿlamūn · Bi'l-bayyināti wa'l-zubur, wa anzalnā ilayka'l-dhikra li-tubayyina li'l-nāsi mā nuzzila ilayhim wa laʿallahum yatafakkarūn
"And before you We sent none but men to whom We gave revelation. If you do not know, ask the people of the reminder. · With the clear proofs and the scriptures. And We have sent down to you the reminder, that you may make clear to people what has been sent down to them, and that they may reflect."
Torn from its context, this verse comes to say something altogether different. The context must therefore be set out first and openly.
The first half of the sentence is this: wa mā arsalnā min qablika illā rijālan nūḥī ilayhim — "and before you We sent none but human beings to whom We gave revelation."
There is, then, an objection in view, and the subject of the objection is this: that the messenger is a human being. This objection is recorded at many places in the Qurʾān and was treated in this commentary: at al-Anbiyāʾ, 21/3 and 21/7-8 (hal hādhā illā basharun mithlukum; wa mā jaʿalnāhum jasadan lā yaʾkulūna'l-ṭaʿām), at al-Aḥqāf, 46/9 (mā kuntu bidʿan mina'l-rusul), at Fāṭir, 35/4.
And the command fa'sʾalū ahla'l-dhikr is the second half of the answer given to that objection: "if you do not know that the earlier messengers too were human beings, ask those who do know."
Insisting on this context is obligatory, because torn from it the verse can be presented as a general and unlimited principle of consulting authority. The text does not say that. What the verse commands to be asked about is definite: the nature of the earlier messengers.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure of the sentence itself: the command fa'sʾalū is joined by fāʾ to the preceding clause — it is therefore a clause of consequence, not an independent principle. And the conditional clause narrows it further: in kuntum lā taʿlamūn — "if you do not know."
The same verse occurs word for word at al-Anbiyāʾ, 21/7, and the disagreement was tabulated there. I rely on that treatment and bring the table over here:
| View | Who the ahl al-dhikr are | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The people of the earlier scriptures | The matter at issue is what the earlier messengers were; it is they who know this |
| 2 | Those who possess knowledge, generally | The wording allows it; dhikr means "what is known, what is remembered" |
| 3 | Here dhikr is the Qurʾān; its people are those who know it | The next verse says wa anzalnā ilayka'l-dhikr |
But it must be recorded that the third view has an internal ground, and this one is peculiar to al-Naḥl: in the forty-fourth verse the same word is used of the Book that is sent down. There was a similar movement in al-Anbiyāʾ — there, three verses later, it said dhikrukum, and in the al-Anbiyāʾ section this was recorded: "ask (7) → if you do not know (7) → you already have it in your hand (10)."
| Verse | Dhikr | In whose hand |
|---|---|---|
| 43 | Ahla'l-dhikr | Others — those who are to be asked |
| 44 | Wa anzalnā ilayka'l-dhikr | The addressee himself |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading: the command does not set up a standing dependence. What is commanded to be asked about is placed, immediately afterwards, into the addressee's own hand.
A note required by the method (Method)
This verse has been used in very different places and to very different ends throughout history. In this commentary nothing is loaded onto the verse beyond what its wording and its context give.
| # | Item | Its warrant in the text |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The subject of the asking is definite | That the earlier messengers were human — illā rijālan nūḥī ilayhim |
| 2 | The condition for asking is not knowing | In kuntum lā taʿlamūn |
| 3 | Whom one is to ask is disputed | The three views above |
Inferences that go beyond these three items — on what subject one is to ask whom, how an authority in knowledge is to be constituted, how binding it is — come not from the wording of the verse but from later debates. This commentary does not enter that debate, and no legal ruling is issued.
Rijāl — men. Some exegetes have drawn a ruling from this word; others record that the word is used here for the contrast not an angel, but a human being — because what the sentence is about is not the messenger's sex but his kind. I transmit both explanations and lay down no ruling in this commentary; the objection the verse answers is, in the text's own words, that the messenger is a mortal man.
زُبُر — the plural of zabūr, root ز-ب-ر: to write, to incise in stone. Zabara'l-kitāb — he wrote it. In the root there is hardness and permanence; zubratu'l-ḥadīd — a lump of iron.
The same pair occurred at Fāṭir, 35/25 (jāʾathum rusuluhum bi'l-bayyināti wa bi'l-zuburi wa bi'l-kitābi'l-munīr) — there it was a threesome, here a pair. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
The root ب-ي-ن occurs at three different places in the sūra and in three different tasks, and this is one of the sūra's structural signs:
| Verse | Expression | Who makes clear | What |
|---|---|---|---|
| 39 | Li-yubayyina lahumu'lladhī yakhtalifūna fīh | God | What is disputed — in the hereafter |
| 44 | Li-tubayyina li'l-nāsi mā nuzzila ilayhim | The Prophet | What has been sent down — in this world |
| 92 | Wa la-yubayyinanna lakum yawma'l-qiyāmati mā kuntum fīhi takhtalifūn | God | What is disputed — in the hereafter, to the second person |
| 89 | Wa nazzalnā ʿalayka'l-kitāba tibyānan li-kulli shayʾ | The Book itself | Everything |
All four occurrences can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: the work of making clear is distributed among three distinct subjects — the Book, the messenger, and finally God. And the order is worth recording: the Book makes clear, the messenger makes clear, and what is left over is made clear in the hereafter. A place is thus shown where disagreement will be closed, if it does not close in this world.
أَفَأَمِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ مَكَرُوا۟ ٱلسَّيِّـَٔاتِ أَن يَخْسِفَ ٱللَّهُ بِهِمُ ٱلْأَرْضَ أَوْ يَأْتِيَهُمُ ٱلْعَذَابُ مِنْ حَيْثُ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ · أَوْ يَأْخُذَهُمْ فِى تَقَلُّبِهِمْ فَمَا هُم بِمُعْجِزِينَ · أَوْ يَأْخُذَهُمْ عَلَىٰ تَخَوُّفٍ فَإِنَّ رَبَّكُمْ لَرَءُوفٌ رَّحِيمٌ
A-fa-amina'lladhīna makaru'l-sayyiʾāti an yakhsifa'llāhu bihimu'l-arḍa aw yaʾtiyahumu'l-ʿadhābu min ḥaythu lā yashʿurūn · Aw yaʾkhudhahum fī taqallubihim fa-mā hum bi-muʿjizīn · Aw yaʾkhudhahum ʿalā takhawwuf, fa-inna rabbakum la-raʾūfun raḥīm
"Do those who plotted evil feel safe that God will not make the earth swallow them, or that the punishment will not come at them from where they do not perceive it? · Or that He will not seize them as they go to and fro — and they cannot thwart Him. · Or that He will not seize them amid a mounting fear. Your Lord is truly most kind, most merciful."
| Order | Possibility | Kind |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Yakhsifa'llāhu bihimu'l-arḍ | The earth swallowing them — sudden, total |
| 2 | Yaʾtiyahumu'l-ʿadhābu min ḥaythu lā yashʿurūn | From where it is not reckoned — sudden, unlooked for |
| 3 | Yaʾkhudhahum fī taqallubihim | At their business — inside daily life |
| 4 | Yaʾkhudhahum ʿalā takhawwuf | Upon fear — slow, by diminishing |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is this ordering: the list runs from the most sudden to the most gradual. The first two happen in an instant; the third while they are on the move; the fourth is spread over time.
And this must be recorded: wa atāhumu'l-ʿadhābu min ḥaythu lā yashʿurūn had already occurred in the twenty-sixth verse — about a people of the past. Here the same sentence comes back as a possibility. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and it turns an example into a warning.
تَقَلُّب — root ق-ل-ب: to turn, to overturn. A verbal noun of Form V: taqallub, to turn about, to pass from one state into another. The lexicographers record here in particular the going to and fro on the roads for trade.
تَخَوُّف — root خ-و-ف: fear. There is disagreement over the sense of the word here, and it must be set out in a table:
| Reading | What ʿalā takhawwuf is | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | To be seized while in fear | The common sense of the root |
| 2 | To be seized by diminishing — takhawwuf, "to reduce" | It is transmitted that in some Arab dialects the verb takhawwafa is used in the sense "he reduced it, ate it away at the edge" |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The second reading sits better with the four-step ordering above — for what is expected at the end of the list is gradualness. I record this as an observation, not as a preference.
| Verse | Closing | What comes before it |
|---|---|---|
| 7 | Inna rabbakum la-raʾūfun raḥīm | A favour — the beast that carries loads |
| 47 | Fa-inna rabbakum la-raʾūfun raḥīm | Four possibilities of punishment |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being these two contexts: the same two names, the one after a favour, the other after a threat. The verse thereby says that the deferral too comes from the same attribute — for not one of the four possibilities has come to pass.
أَوَلَمْ يَرَوْا۟ إِلَىٰ مَا خَلَقَ ٱللَّهُ مِن شَىْءٍ يَتَفَيَّؤُا۟ ظِلَٰلُهُۥ عَنِ ٱلْيَمِينِ وَٱلشَّمَآئِلِ سُجَّدًا لِّلَّهِ وَهُمْ دَٰخِرُونَ · وَلِلَّهِ يَسْجُدُ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مِن دَآبَّةٍ وَٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ وَهُمْ لَا يَسْتَكْبِرُونَ · يَخَافُونَ رَبَّهُم مِّن فَوْقِهِمْ وَيَفْعَلُونَ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ
A-wa-lam yaraw ilā mā khalaqa'llāhu min shayʾin yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū ʿani'l-yamīni wa'l-shamāʾili sujjadan li'llāhi wa hum dākhirūn · Wa li'llāhi yasjudu mā fi'l-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍi min dābbatin wa'l-malāʾikatu wa hum lā yastakbirūn · Yakhāfūna rabbahum min fawqihim wa yafʿalūna mā yuʾmarūn
"Have they not looked at the things God has created? Their shadows turn to the right and to the left, prostrating themselves to God, and they are lowly. · To God prostrates whatever is in the heavens and whatever is on the earth of living creatures, and the angels; and they do not make themselves great. · They fear their Lord above them, and they do what they are commanded."
The proof from the shadow was treated in detail in this commentary: at al-Furqān, 25/45-46 (a-lam tara ilā rabbika kayfa madda'l-ẓilla wa law shāʾa la-jaʿalahū sākinā, thumma jaʿalna'l-shamsa ʿalayhi dalīlā, thumma qabaḍnāhu ilaynā qabḍan yasīrā). I rely on that treatment and summarise what was recorded there:
"A shadow is a thing with no existence of its own. It cannot be held and cannot be measured; it exists only by the existence of something else. And it is precisely this that the verse makes into a proof." "What one expects is that the shadow should be the proof of the sun. The verse says the reverse: the sun is the proof of the shadow. When a shadow is to be read, the place to look is not the shadow itself — it is its source."
| al-Furqān 25/45-46 | al-Naḥl 16/48 | |
|---|---|---|
| The verb | Madda'l-ẓill — He stretched it out; qabaḍnāhu — We drew it in | Yatafayyaʾu — it turns to and fro |
| The tense | Perfect — an ordering already made | Imperfect — it goes on |
| The agent | God — who stretches the shadow out and draws it in | The shadow itself — ẓilāluhū is the subject |
| What the proof is about | The existence of an order — jaʿala'l-shamsa ʿalayhi dalīlā | Submission — sujjadan li'llāhi wa hum dākhirūn |
| The word | ظِلّ (ẓill) — shadow in general | تَفَيُّؤ (tafayyuʾ) — the turning shadow |
| What is asked | A-lam tara — singular, the addressee | A-wa-lam yaraw — plural, third person |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of agent: in al-Furqān the shadow is passive — it is stretched out and drawn in. In al-Naḥl the shadow is the agent: it turns of itself, it prostrates of itself. The same fact is given in the one as the object of an ordering, in the other as the subject of an obedience.
The choice of this word is the most striking thing in the verse, and the root was analysed in detail at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9. I rely on that treatment and bring its notes over here:
"Root: ف-ي-ء. The primary sense the lexicographers record: to turn, to turn back. And the concrete picture in the root is this: al-fayʾ is the shadow that turns back after the sun has passed the zenith."
| Word | Root | Which shadow |
|---|---|---|
| ظِلّ (ẓill) | ظ-ل-ل | Shadow in general; and in particular the shadow that shortens from morning to noon |
| فَيْء (fayʾ) | ف-ي-ء | The shadow that turns back and lengthens after noon |
And the picture recorded in the al-Ḥujurāt section was this: in the morning the shadow is long; as the sun rises it shortens; at noon it all but vanishes; then it turns back and lengthens until evening.
What belongs here must be recorded, and the verse uses the two words together: yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū. The verb is from the root ف-ي-ء, its subject from the root ظ-ل-ل.
I record this as an observation about the language: two roots come together in one sentence. The verse says "shadow", and names the work the shadow does with the verb to turn. A motionless object is thereby made a moving agent.
And it was recorded that in al-Ḥujurāt the verb tafīʾa was chosen for a moral turning — the attacking party's "returning to its place". In al-Naḥl the same verb tells of a turning that takes place in nature.
| Place | The verb fayʾ | What turns |
|---|---|---|
| al-Ḥujurāt 49/9 | Ḥattā tafīʾa ilā amri'llāh | The attacking party — to God's command |
| al-Naḥl 16/48 | Yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū | The shadow — to the right and to the left |
The same root: in the one a turning that is asked for, in the other a turning that takes place. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras. And the idea recorded in al-Ḥujurāt of "returning to one's natural condition" stands, in al-Naḥl's usage, in the word's own home: the shadow turns not under compulsion but of itself, by the course of the sun.
There is an asymmetry in the wording, and the lexicographers dwell on it: al-yamīn is singular, al-shamāʾil plural.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| 1 | Yamīn here is a generic noun; it comes in the singular but carries a plural sense |
| 2 | The right is one direction, the left sides are many — a body has one right, but its shadow may fall in more than one direction |
| 3 | Agreement with the verse-ending — the word was chosen to suit the sound of the sentence |
All three explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. But the fact itself can be verified from the text and must be recorded.
The verse ascribes prostration to the shadow. This is a pattern treated at many places in this commentary: the ascribing of an act to beings that are inanimate or without will.
The forty-ninth verse gives the scope openly: wa li'llāhi yasjudu mā fi'l-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍi min dābbatin wa'l-malāʾika.
And the word order must be recorded: the angels are enumerated separately — wa'l-malāʾika. Yet "what is in the heavens" would already have covered them.
The lexicographers count this separate enumeration as takhṣīṣ (naming a thing specially). And I give this as an observation: the angels are named together with the note that follows immediately upon them, wa hum lā yastakbirūn (they do not make themselves great). The reason they are enumerated separately is therefore the attribute that follows.
دَآبَّة — root د-ب-ب: a living thing that moves upon the ground. The root was treated at al-Jāthiya, 45/4; I do not repeat it here.
The word was treated at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), 40/60, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there was this:
"دَاخِرِين — root د-خ-ر: to be made small, to bow the neck, to be brought low. The word is the exact opposite of pride, and it is set against it in the same sentence."
| Place | Of whom dākhirīn is said | Its opposite |
|---|---|---|
| Ghāfir 40/60 | Alladhīna yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatī sa-yadkhulūna jahannama dākhirīn | Yastakbirūn — in the same sentence |
| al-Naḥl 16/48-49 | The shadows and those who prostrate — wa hum dākhirūn | Wa hum lā yastakbirūn (49) — in the next verse |
The same two words, set against each other in two different sūras. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
And the difference must be recorded; I give it as my own reading: in Ghāfir being dākhir is a punishment — the end of the one who makes himself great. In al-Naḥl it is a state — the attribute of what is already so. The same word, then, is in the one a position one is brought down to, in the other a position one already occupies.
The lexicographers dwell on the construction: min fawqihim — "from above them", or "who is above them".
| Reading | What it attaches to |
|---|---|
| 1 | Rabbahum min fawqihim — they fear their Lord, who is above them |
| 2 | Yakhāfūna … min fawqihim — the direction from which the fear comes |
And the closing of the verse must be recorded: wa yafʿalūna mā yuʾmarūn — "and they do what they are commanded."
I give this as an observation, and it bears on the sūra as a whole: the forty-eighth verse enumerated the shadows, the forty-ninth living creatures and angels. The fiftieth ties their common attribute to a single act: obeying the command. And the sūra had already named, in its fourth verse, the one being that does not obey that command: khaṣīmun mubīn.
وَقَالَ ٱللَّهُ لَا تَتَّخِذُوٓا۟ إِلَٰهَيْنِ ٱثْنَيْنِ إِنَّمَا هُوَ إِلَٰهٌ وَٰحِدٌ فَإِيَّٰىَ فَٱرْهَبُونِ · وَلَهُۥ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَلَهُ ٱلدِّينُ وَاصِبًا أَفَغَيْرَ ٱللَّهِ تَتَّقُونَ · وَمَا بِكُم مِّن نِّعْمَةٍ فَمِنَ ٱللَّهِ ثُمَّ إِذَا مَسَّكُمُ ٱلضُّرُّ فَإِلَيْهِ تَجْـَٔرُونَ
Wa qāla'llāhu lā tattakhidhū ilāhayni'thnayn, innamā huwa ilāhun wāḥid, fa-iyyāya fa'rhabūn · Wa lahū mā fi'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa lahu'l-dīnu wāṣibā, a-fa-ghayra'llāhi tattaqūn · Wa mā bikum min niʿmatin fa-mina'llāh, thumma idhā massakumu'l-ḍurru fa-ilayhi tajʾarūn
"God said: 'Do not take two gods; He is only one god. So fear Me, and Me alone.' · To Him belongs whatever is in the heavens and the earth, and to Him belongs religion, unceasingly. Will you then guard yourselves against any but God? · Every favour you have is from God. Then, when hardship touches you, it is to Him that you cry aloud."
The lexicographers count this as emphasis. But one further explanation belonging here must be recorded, and I give it as an observation: the stress falls not on two but on more than one. And the answering clause bears this out: innamā huwa ilāhun wāḥid — here too the adjective wāḥid (one) has been added separately.
| Explanation | Sense | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Continuous, unbroken | Waṣaba — it continued; wāṣib — perpetual |
| 2 | Obligatory, that to which submission is due | Waṣab — weariness, toil; from this, "what is burdensome" |
The majority of the lexicographers give the first sense. I transmit both explanations; I do not impose a preference.
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: the long, pain-drawn bellowing of an animal. Juʾār — the cry of cattle and of like beasts.
The choice of the word is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: the verse does not say tadʿūn (you call, you pray). It chooses the sound that comes before speech. The turning in the moment of distress is thus named not as a considered prayer but as a sound that escapes without thought.
The word occurs at few places in the Qurʾān; it is recorded that in this form it is found here and in the twenty-third sūra (al-Muʾminūn 23/64).
The same cycle was treated at many places in this commentary: al-ʿAnkabūt 29/65, al-Rūm 30/33 and 30/49-51, Luqmān 31/32. I rely on those treatments. In the al-Rūm section this cycle was tabulated: hardship → turning → mercy → association. al-Naḥl builds the same cycle between its fifty-third and fifty-fifth verses.
ثُمَّ إِذَا كَشَفَ ٱلضُّرَّ عَنكُمْ إِذَا فَرِيقٌ مِّنكُم بِرَبِّهِمْ يُشْرِكُونَ · لِيَكْفُرُوا۟ بِمَآ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُمْ فَتَمَتَّعُوا۟ فَسَوْفَ تَعْلَمُونَ · وَيَجْعَلُونَ لِمَا لَا يَعْلَمُونَ نَصِيبًا مِّمَّا رَزَقْنَٰهُمْ تَٱللَّهِ لَتُسْـَٔلُنَّ عَمَّا كُنتُمْ تَفْتَرُونَ
Thumma idhā kashafa'l-ḍurra ʿankum idhā farīqun minkum bi-rabbihim yushrikūn · Li-yakfurū bimā ātaynāhum, fa-tamattaʿū fa-sawfa taʿlamūn · Wa yajʿalūna li-mā lā yaʿlamūna naṣīban mimmā razaqnāhum, ta'llāhi la-tusʾalunna ʿammā kuntum taftarūn
"Then, when He removes the hardship from you, at once a party among you associates others with their Lord. · So as to be ungrateful for what We have given them. Take your enjoyment, then; you will come to know. · And out of the provision We have given them they set aside a share for what knows nothing. By God, you shall surely be questioned about what you were inventing."
| Idhā | Its work | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Condition — "when…" | Idhā kashafa'l-ḍurra ʿankum |
| 2 | Idhā fujāʾiyya — "and behold" | Idhā farīqun minkum … yushrikūn |
Idhā fujāʾiyya was treated at many places in this commentary: Yāsīn 36/77 and al-Rūm 30/20. And the same particle was used in the sūra's fourth verse (fa-idhā huwa khaṣīmun mubīn). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
I record this as an observation about the word order: the same particle is used in the sūra's fourth verse for the passage from creation to disputation, and in the fifty-fourth for the passage from rescue to association. Both passages are given in the same way, with the steps between them leapt over.
فَرِيقٌ مِّنكُم — and the scope must be recorded. The verse does not say "all of you": farīqun minkum — "a party among you". And the same care was recorded at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/47; I rely on that treatment. Per the method (Method) the same line is kept here: the ruling is tied not to a group but to a stance.
| Reading | Who does not know | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The things for which the share is set aside — "those that know nothing" | It coincides with amwātun ghayru aḥyāʾ in the twentieth verse |
| 2 | Those who set the share aside — "for things they do not know" | They do not know what it is they are setting a share aside for |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The internal ground of the first reading is the twentieth verse (wa mā yashʿurūna ayyāna yubʿathūn); I record this as an observation.
تَٱللَّهِ — the oath particle tāʾ. In Arabic there are three oath particles (wāw, bāʾ, tāʾ), and the lexicographers record that the tāʾ is the least used of them and that it mostly conveys wonder and astonishment. And in the Qurʾān an oath with tāʾ comes only with the name Allāh.
وَيَجْعَلُونَ لِلَّهِ ٱلْبَنَٰتِ سُبْحَٰنَهُۥ وَلَهُم مَّا يَشْتَهُونَ · وَإِذَا بُشِّرَ أَحَدُهُم بِٱلْأُنثَىٰ ظَلَّ وَجْهُهُۥ مُسْوَدًّا وَهُوَ كَظِيمٌ · يَتَوَٰرَىٰ مِنَ ٱلْقَوْمِ مِن سُوٓءِ مَا بُشِّرَ بِهِۦٓ أَيُمْسِكُهُۥ عَلَىٰ هُونٍ أَمْ يَدُسُّهُۥ فِى ٱلتُّرَابِ أَلَا سَآءَ مَا يَحْكُمُونَ
Wa yajʿalūna li'llāhi'l-banāti subḥānahū wa lahum mā yashtahūn · Wa idhā bushshira aḥaduhum bi'l-unthā ẓalla wajhuhū muswaddan wa huwa kaẓīm · Yatawārā mina'l-qawmi min sūʾi mā bushshira bih, a-yumsikuhū ʿalā hūnin am yadussuhū fi'l-turāb, alā sāʾa mā yaḥkumūn
"They assign daughters to God — glory be to Him — and to themselves what they crave. · When one of them is given news of a girl, his face turns black and he is choked with rage. · He hides himself from the people because of the evil of the news given him: is he to keep her in humiliation, or bury her in the dust? Beware — evil is the judgement they make!"
A note required by the method (Method), to be entered at the outset
In treating these three verses one thing must be kept clear from the start, and the same note was entered at al-Zukhruf, 43/17-18:
The verse lays down no ruling about women. The verse reports the stance of a society towards a female child, and shows the contradiction inside that stance.
| Half | Expression | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Wa yajʿalūna li'llāhi'l-banāt | To God — daughters |
| 2 | Wa lahum mā yashtahūn | To themselves — what they crave |
The verb in the second half must be recorded: yashtahūn — root ش-ه-و: appetite, desire, the craving of the self.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is this verb: in the second half the verse does not say "sons". It says "what they crave". The measure is thus named not as a fact but as an appetite. With this word the sentence says that the preference rests not on a judgement but on a craving.
And subḥānahū comes in between — between the two halves. I give this as an observation about the word order: the sentence of tanzīh is placed immediately after the ascription, before the comparison is made. The sentence thus rejects one half before it sets the two halves side by side.
This scene occurs in three places in the Qurʾān, and all three were treated in this commentary. The comparison was already made at al-Takwīr, 81/8-9 (mawʾūda), and at al-Zukhruf, 43/17 (bimā ḍaraba li'l-raḥmāni mathalā). I rely on those treatments and complete the table from here, from the place where the wording is plainest:
| al-Naḥl 16/57-59 | al-Takwīr 81/8-9 | al-Zukhruf 43/17 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| The centre of the scene | The father — his reaction and his hesitation | The child — the weight laid upon her | The father — his contradiction |
| The key word | يَدُسُّ (yadussu) — to bury in secret | مَوْءُودَة (mawʾūda) — one upon whom a weight was laid | bimā ḍaraba … mathalā — the thing he ascribes |
| The picture in the root | To push a thing secretly inside another | A weight coming down upon one | (not a root but a construction) |
| Form | A verb — the father the agent | A passive participle — the name of the victim | A relative clause — the ascription |
| The word "girl" | Bi'l-unthā — said outright | Mawʾūda — feminine, but "girl" is not said | Not said at all |
| The work of the verse | Diagnosis — the motive is named | Reckoning — the question is put to the victim | The showing of a contradiction |
| The closing | Alā sāʾa mā yaḥkumūn | Bi-ayyi dhanbin qutilat | A-fa-man yunashshaʾu fi'l-ḥilya… |
The three verses take hold of the same fact from three different sides, and this table is the completed form of what was drawn up in al-Takwīr and al-Zukhruf.
And I record this as my own reading, its ground being the fifth line: the one place where the word is said outright is al-Naḥl. al-Takwīr names the victim but does not say "girl"; al-Zukhruf does not say it at all, and leaves the reader alone with his own ascription. al-Naḥl builds the scene in full plainness, using the word itself. Read together, the three verses show the same event told from three distances: from closest up (al-Naḥl), from the victim's place (al-Takwīr), and from inside the mind (al-Zukhruf).
The root was analysed in detail at al-Shams, 91/10, and this verse was named there. I rely on that treatment and take over its notes:
"The concrete sense of the root: to push a thing secretly inside another, to hide it, to bury it." "دَسِيسَة (dasīsa) — a hidden trap, a stratagem. In Turkish the borrowed word is still in everyday use." "The verb دَسَّ, in the Qurʾān's own usage, means to put a living being under the earth."
And in the al-Shams section this connection was recorded: the root occurs in only two places in the Qurʾān — here and at al-Shams 91/10 (wa qad khāba man dassāhā). The verb used of the man who buries his own soul is thus the very verb of this verse.
| Option | Verb | Root | What |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | A-yumsikuhū ʿalā hūn | م-س-ك | To keep — but with the qualification hūn |
| 2 | Am yadussuhū fi'l-turāb | د-س-س | To push it secretly into the dust |
هُون — root ه-و-ن: lightness, worthlessness, humiliation. Hawn — ease; hūn / hawān — humiliation. The same root opens in two opposite directions, and the lexicographers record it: a thing's being light is either ease or worthlessness.
And the side of the two options that must be recorded is this: the verse offers no good option. The first is "to keep" — but ʿalā hūn, in humiliation. Both of the ways offered are evil, and the verse closes on both with a sentence of judgement: alā sāʾa mā yaḥkumūn.
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the qualification ʿalā hūn: what the verse condemns is not the act of burying alone. How the keeping is done is condemned as well. The diagnosis therefore begins before the killing — in the counting of a child as a burden and a shame.
This sentence occurred word for word at al-Zukhruf, 43/17, and was treated there in detail. I rely on that treatment and summarise its notes:
"ظَلَّ is a defective verb: to be in a state through the day, to remain in that state. The sentence therefore does not say 'his face turned black'; it says 'his face remained blackened'. It conveys duration." "مُسْوَدًّا — root س-و-د, an active participle of Form IX. In Arabic Form IX (ifʿilāl) is used almost only for colours and defects, and the form conveys a colour's settling upon a person." "كَظِيم — root ك-ظ-م. Kaẓama'l-qirba — he filled a waterskin and tied its mouth. Kaẓīm is on the faʿīl pattern and denotes one who ties his own mouth shut; makẓūm (al-Qalam 68/48) denotes one stopped up from outside."
One — the difference between bi'l-unthā and bimā ḍaraba. In al-Zukhruf the word did not occur at all; here it does. In the al-Zukhruf section it was recorded: "The word — 'girl' — does not occur in the sentence. In its place the man's own ascription is used as a definition." al-Naḥl does not do this.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording of the two verses: al-Zukhruf hides the word in order to show the contradiction. al-Naḥl says the word in order to tell what happened. The work of the two verses differs, and so does their wording.
Two — the tension produced by the verb bushshira. It was recorded in al-Zukhruf: bushshira is the verb for announcing good news; the reaction that follows is the reaction to bad news. In naming the event, then, the verse declares its side: what has happened is glad tidings.
And al-Naḥl does this once more, with the same root and more sharply: min sūʾi mā bushshira bih — "because of the evil of what he was given glad tidings of".
This construction must be recorded, and it was named in al-Zukhruf as well: sūʾ (evil) and bushshira (he was given glad tidings) stand side by side within a single expression. The two words give each other the lie.
I give this as my own reading; its ground is that juxtaposition: the evil lies not in the event but in the appraisal. The verse goes on calling the thing "glad tidings" and does not ascribe the evil to it — sūʾi mā bushshira bih, "the evil of what he was given glad tidings of", is the evil as it stands in the man's own eyes. The sentence transmits an appraisal; it does not lay down a ruling.
The root: to hide oneself, to take cover behind something. Warāʾ — what is behind; tawārā — he drew back, he hid himself.
And the object of the verb must be recorded: mina'l-qawm — "from the people". The party he hides from is his own community.
I give this as an observation, and it agrees with the historical frame recorded in al-Takwīr: it was recorded there that this practice was not widespread, but known and capable of being condoned. The wording of the verse supports this: had the practice been counted ordinary by the society, there would have been no need to hide. The man hides from a shame — and the verse says what the shame is: that a girl has been given to him.
The historical frame of this subject was given in detail in al-Takwīr: the two distinct motives the Qurʾān names (shame and the fear of poverty), the need to avoid both exaggerations about how widespread the practice was, and the fact that it was not the characteristic of one people. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.
Only this need be added here: these three verses of al-Naḥl are the plainest textual source for the "shame" motive within that frame. al-Isrāʾ 17/31 and al-Anʿām 6/151 say "your children" and do not specify sex; this verse, by saying bi'l-unthā, names a distinct fact.
And this must be recorded: what was done in the fifty-seventh verse was also a judgement — assigning daughters to God and to themselves what they crave. What is done in the fifty-ninth is also a judgement — whether to keep or to bury.
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the verb itself: the verse names in a single word what it has been describing for three verses: the giving of judgement. And the judgement given is wrong in two places at once — both in what is ascribed above and in what is decided at home. The same measure is at work in two different places.
لِلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ مَثَلُ ٱلسَّوْءِ وَلِلَّهِ ٱلْمَثَلُ ٱلْأَعْلَىٰ وَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلْحَكِيمُ · وَلَوْ يُؤَاخِذُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلنَّاسَ بِظُلْمِهِم مَّا تَرَكَ عَلَيْهَا مِن دَآبَّةٍ وَلَٰكِن يُؤَخِّرُهُمْ إِلَىٰٓ أَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّى · وَيَجْعَلُونَ لِلَّهِ مَا يَكْرَهُونَ وَتَصِفُ أَلْسِنَتُهُمُ ٱلْكَذِبَ أَنَّ لَهُمُ ٱلْحُسْنَىٰ لَا جَرَمَ أَنَّ لَهُمُ ٱلنَّارَ وَأَنَّهُم مُّفْرَطُونَ
Lilladhīna lā yuʾminūna bi'l-ākhirati mathalu'l-sawʾ, wa li'llāhi'l-mathalu'l-aʿlā, wa huwa'l-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm · Wa law yuʾākhidhu'llāhu'l-nāsa bi-ẓulmihim mā taraka ʿalayhā min dābbatin wa lākin yuʾakhkhiruhum ilā ajalin musammā · Wa yajʿalūna li'llāhi mā yakrahūna wa taṣifu alsinatuhumu'l-kadhiba anna lahumu'l-ḥusnā, lā jarama anna lahumu'l-nāra wa annahum mufraṭūn
"To those who do not believe in the hereafter belongs the likeness of evil; and to God belongs the highest likeness. He is the Mighty, the Wise. · Were God to take people to task for their wrongdoing He would not leave a single creature upon the earth; but He defers them to an appointed term. · They assign to God what they themselves dislike, and their tongues frame the lie that the best is theirs. Beyond doubt the Fire is theirs, and they are sent on ahead."
This verse occurs at Fāṭir, 35/45, in almost the same words, and was treated there in detail as the closing verse of that sūra. I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there:
"عَلَىٰ ظَهْرِهَا — 'upon its back'. The verse does not say what the pronoun refers to; the lexicographers record that it is the earth." "In telling of the deferral of the punishment the scope is not kept to man — min dābba, every living thing upon the earth." "إِلَىٰٓ أَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّى — to a term that has been named. The same construction was treated at al-Aḥqāf, 46/3, and at al-Zumar, 39/42."
| Fāṭir 35/45 | al-Naḥl 16/61 | |
|---|---|---|
| The cause | Bimā kasabū — for what they have earned | Bi-ẓulmihim — for their wrongdoing |
| The pronoun | ʿAlā ẓahrihā — "upon its back" | ʿAlayhā — "upon it" |
| Its place in the sūra | The last verse — a closing | In the middle — inside a block |
I record this as an observation: Fāṭir uses a general word for what is earned; al-Naḥl, in the middle of a sūra and directly after the scene of the infant daughter, narrows the word and says wrongdoing. The context explains the choice of word.
The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: to go ahead, to go in front; and to neglect a thing and leave it behind. Faraṭ — the scout who goes ahead of the caravan to find water.
There is disagreement over the reading and the sense of the word here, and it must be set out in a table:
| Reading | Word | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Mufraṭūn (with fatḥa on the rāʾ) | Sent on ahead, dispatched first to the Fire — from the picture of the faraṭ |
| 2 | Mufriṭūn (with kasra on the rāʾ) | Those who overstep — from the root ifrāṭ |
| 3 | Mufarriṭūn | Those who neglect, who leave things behind — from the root tafrīṭ |
All three readings are transmitted in the sources on the variant readings, and the sense changes accordingly. I do not impose a preference.
And the first reading has a certain internal appeal, which I record as an observation: an irony is set up between the concrete picture in the root (the scout of the caravan) and the subject of the sentence (the going to the Fire) — to be in front is not, this time, a distinction.
تَٱللَّهِ لَقَدْ أَرْسَلْنَآ إِلَىٰٓ أُمَمٍ مِّن قَبْلِكَ فَزَيَّنَ لَهُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ أَعْمَٰلَهُمْ فَهُوَ وَلِيُّهُمُ ٱلْيَوْمَ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ · وَمَآ أَنزَلْنَا عَلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ إِلَّا لِتُبَيِّنَ لَهُمُ ٱلَّذِى ٱخْتَلَفُوا۟ فِيهِ وَهُدًى وَرَحْمَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يُؤْمِنُونَ
Ta'llāhi laqad arsalnā ilā umamin min qablika fa-zayyana lahumu'l-shayṭānu aʿmālahum fa-huwa waliyyuhumu'l-yawma wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm · Wa mā anzalnā ʿalayka'l-kitāba illā li-tubayyina lahumu'lladhi'khtalafū fīhi wa hudan wa raḥmatan li-qawmin yuʾminūn
"By God, We sent messengers to communities before you; but Satan made their deeds seem fair to them. Today too he is their patron, and for them there is a painful punishment. · We sent down the Book to you only that you might make clear to them that over which they differed, and as guidance and mercy for a people who believe."
The root ز-ي-ن and the verb tazyīn were treated at many places in this commentary, and a pattern was recorded there: at Fāṭir, 35/8, and at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), 40/37, the verb came in the passive — the one who made things seem fair was not named.
This is a difference that must be recorded, and I give it as an observation: the same verb comes in some places without an agent and in others with one. And even where the agent is named, man's responsibility is not lifted — for the verse says fa-huwa waliyyuhum: the patronage is a relationship that has been accepted.
It must be recorded: the sentence li-yubayyina lahumu'lladhī yakhtalifūna fīh occurred in the thirty-ninth verse — there the subject was God and the time was the hereafter.
In the sixty-fourth the same sentence returns with the subject changed: li-tubayyina lahumu'lladhi'khtalafū fīh — the subject is the Prophet, the time this world.
| Verse | Verb | Subject | Tense | When |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 39 | Li-yubayyina | God | Yakhtalifūna — imperfect, still going on | In the hereafter |
| 64 | Li-tubayyina | The Prophet | Ikhtalafū — perfect, done | In this world |
The difference of tense must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: in the thirty-ninth verse the disagreement is something still going on; in the sixty-fourth something already over. The Book, then, is for making clear a disagreement that ought to have been settled; the hereafter, for closing the one that goes on.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and the root's series in the sūra has five links (39, 44, 64, 89, 92) — all five from the root ب-ي-ن, and all five tying the work of making clear to a different subject or to a different time.
وَٱللَّهُ أَنزَلَ مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مَآءً فَأَحْيَا بِهِ ٱلْأَرْضَ بَعْدَ مَوْتِهَآ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يَسْمَعُونَ
Wa'llāhu anzala mina'l-samāʾi māʾan fa-aḥyā bihi'l-arḍa baʿda mawtihā, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yasmaʿūn
"God sent down water from the sky and with it revived the earth after its death. In that there is a sign for a people who hear."
And the opening is a repetition of an item from the first enumeration: the tenth verse too said anzala mina'l-samāʾi māʾan.
| Verse 10 | Verse 65 | |
|---|---|---|
| The work of the water | Lakum minhu sharāb — drink, pasture | Fa-aḥyā bihi'l-arḍa baʿda mawtihā — reviving |
| The addressee | Lakum — for you | no lakum |
| The closing | (none — the series goes on) | Li-qawmin yasmaʿūn |
I record this as my own reading; its ground is the difference between the two verses: in the first enumeration the water was named as a benefit; in the second as a proof. The same fact is thus enumerated twice, and in two different tasks.
And the proof from iḥyāʾ baʿda'l-mawt was treated at many places in this commentary: Fāṭir 35/9 (ka-dhālika'l-nushūr), Qāf 50/11 (ka-dhālika'l-khurūj), Fuṣṣilat 41/39, al-Rūm 30/50. I do not repeat it here.
What belongs here must be recorded: in al-Naḥl no link to the resurrection is added to this proof. Fāṭir says ka-dhālika'l-nushūr, Qāf says ka-dhālika'l-khurūj; al-Naḥl says only la-āyatan li-qawmin yasmaʿūn.
I give this as an observation: here the sūra ties the proof not to resurrection but to hearing. And this fits the series of the sūra's closing verbs — the fifth verb enters here.
وَإِنَّ لَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ لَعِبْرَةً نُّسْقِيكُم مِّمَّا فِى بُطُونِهِۦ مِنۢ بَيْنِ فَرْثٍ وَدَمٍ لَّبَنًا خَالِصًا سَآئِغًا لِّلشَّٰرِبِينَ
Wa inna lakum fi'l-anʿāmi la-ʿibra, nusqīkum mimmā fī buṭūnihī min bayni farthin wa damin labanan khāliṣan sāʾighan li'l-shāribīn
"In the livestock too there is a lesson for you: from what is in their bellies, from between the farth and the blood, We give you pure milk to drink, going down easily for those who drink it."
A note required by the method (Method), to be entered at the outset
This verse is one of the places most often used for claims of scientific miracle. This commentary does not take that road.
The reason is an explicit clause of the method: "No hunting for scientific miracles. No modern knowledge is forced onto a verse."
One. The words of the verse were chosen not as the description of a physiology but as the description of a kitchen. It is shown below: the words are not the laboratory's but those of a man who slaughters an animal and opens its belly.
Two, and more important: if you tie the truth of a text to a current scientific interpretation, then when the interpretation changes you have brought the text down along with it. And the verse's own sentence does not ask for this — what it says is given below, in its own words.
The concrete sense of the root: to cross from one bank to the other. ʿUbūr — a crossing; maʿbar — a ford; ʿibāra — the speech that carries a meaning from one mind to another; taʿbīr (the interpretation of dreams) — to pass from the image to the meaning.
The choice of the word must be recorded, and it shows what the verse is doing: the verse does not say āya (sign), it says ʿibra. What is asked for, then, is a crossing from the visible to the unseen.
I give this as my own reading; its ground is the root itself: the word names not a place to stay but a place to cross. And all the detail of the verse — the farth, the blood, the milk — are the steps of that crossing, not its destination.
فَرْث — root ف-ر-ث: the sense the lexicographers give is the digested fodder in an animal's stomach. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.
And the construction must be recorded: min bayni farthin wa dam — "from between the farth and the blood".
I give this as an observation: the verse enumerates three things in succession and gives the middle one a position. The words are what could be seen in the belly of a slaughtered animal — the fodder in the stomach, the blood, and the milk. The description thus stands at the edge of what can be observed.
And there is no claim about a mechanism beyond that in the verse. The verse gives no name of an organ and describes no process. All it says is where the thing that comes out comes from.
The concrete sense of the root: a thing's separating out of a mixture and becoming pure. Khāliṣ — unmixed; ikhlāṣ — the making of religion unmixed. The root was the backbone of al-Zumar and was treated there in detail; I do not repeat it here.
And the work of the word here must be recorded: the verse enumerated two mixed things (the farth and the blood), then names what comes out khāliṣ. The word is thus placed not as a statement of chemistry but as the counterpart of the two words before it.
I give this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the three words: the farth and the dam are mixed; the laban is unmixed. What the sentence does is to say that a separation takes place in between — not how it takes place.
The word was treated at Fāṭir, 35/12, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there was this:
"سَآئِغ — root س-و-غ: to pass easily down the throat. The word describes the drinkability of water by way of ease of swallowing — that is, not a chemical description but a bodily experience."
| Place | What sāʾigh qualifies | Is its opposite present in the verse |
|---|---|---|
| Fāṭir 35/12 | ʿAdhbun furātun sāʾighun sharābuh — sweet water | Yes — milḥun ujāj (salt, bitter) |
| al-Naḥl 16/66 | Labanan khāliṣan sāʾighan li'l-shāribīn | No — no opposite is set |
The difference must be recorded, and I give it as an observation: in Fāṭir the word was part of a comparison; in al-Naḥl it stands alone. And al-Naḥl adds a qualification: li'l-shāribīn — "for those who drink". The ease is described from the drinker's side.
The principle recorded in the Fāṭir section holds here too, and I repeat it: the verse's description is not chemical but bodily. This is linguistic evidence enough not to turn the verse into a text of physiology.
وَمِن ثَمَرَٰتِ ٱلنَّخِيلِ وَٱلْأَعْنَٰبِ تَتَّخِذُونَ مِنْهُ سَكَرًا وَرِزْقًا حَسَنًا إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يَعْقِلُونَ
Wa min thamarāti'l-nakhīli wa'l-aʿnābi tattakhidhūna minhu sakaran wa rizqan ḥasanā, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yaʿqilūn
"And from the fruits of the date palm and the vine you take both sakar and a good provision. In that there is a sign for a people who reason."
Root: س-ك-ر. The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root thus: to cut off the flow of a thing, to block it. Sakara'l-nahra — he dammed the river; from this, sakr — the blocking of the mind's way, drunkenness. The same picture in the root is seen elsewhere in the Qurʾān as well: sukkirat abṣārunā — "our eyes have been sealed over" (al-Ḥijr 15/15).
| View | What sakar is | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | An intoxicating drink | The commonest sense of the root; and the verse's setting it against rizqan ḥasanā |
| 2 | Processed products such as vinegar, syrup, stewed fruit | Some lexicographers record sakar in the sense "what is made from fruit" |
| 3 | What is eaten, what is made use of | It is transmitted that in some dialects sakar has the sense "food" |
And what must be recorded in point of word order is this: the verse separates two things with a wāw: sakaran and rizqan ḥasanā. The two are therefore not the same thing. And only the second is given an adjective: ḥasan (good).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is this asymmetry of adjectives: that no adjective is given to the first shows that the sentence sets no value upon it. The second is expressly described as "good". The sentence enumerates two products but does not put them on a level.
No legal ruling is issued. In the classical sources the relation of this verse to the ruling on wine has been debated at length; this commentary does not enter that debate. What the verse does in its wording is to separate two products and to call only one of them "good".
In the eleventh verse al-nakhīl and al-aʿnāb had already been enumerated — in their raw state. In the sixty-seventh the same pair comes back with its processed product.
| Verse | Expression | Its state |
|---|---|---|
| 11 | Yunbitu lakum bihi'l-zarʿa wa'l-zaytūna wa'l-nakhīla wa'l-aʿnāb | Brought forth — in nature |
| 67 | Wa min thamarāti'l-nakhīli wa'l-aʿnābi tattakhidhūna minh | Processed — by human hands |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being the change of verb: in the eleventh verse the verb is yunbitu — God brings forth. In the sixty-seventh, tattakhidhūna — you take. The second enumeration thus takes the human hand into the list as well.
And this also shows how an item of the enumeration can be misused: two things come out of the same fruit, and the two are not equal. The enumeration records how what is given is used as well.
وَأَوْحَىٰ رَبُّكَ إِلَى ٱلنَّحْلِ أَنِ ٱتَّخِذِى مِنَ ٱلْجِبَالِ بُيُوتًا وَمِنَ ٱلشَّجَرِ وَمِمَّا يَعْرِشُونَ · ثُمَّ كُلِى مِن كُلِّ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ فَٱسْلُكِى سُبُلَ رَبِّكِ ذُلُلًا يَخْرُجُ مِنۢ بُطُونِهَا شَرَابٌ مُّخْتَلِفٌ أَلْوَٰنُهُۥ فِيهِ شِفَآءٌ لِّلنَّاسِ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يَتَفَكَّرُونَ
Wa awḥā rabbuka ila'l-naḥli ani'ttakhidhī mina'l-jibāli buyūtan wa mina'l-shajari wa mimmā yaʿrishūn · Thumma kulī min kulli'l-thamarāti fa'slukī subula rabbiki dhululā, yakhruju min buṭūnihā sharābun mukhtalifun alwānuhū fīhi shifāʾun li'l-nās, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yatafakkarūn
"Your Lord revealed to the honey bee: 'Take houses in the mountains, in the trees, and in the trellises men put up. · Then eat of every kind of fruit, and enter the ways of your Lord in submission.' From their bellies comes a drink of differing colours, in which there is healing for people. In that there is a sign for a people who think."
This is where the sūra takes its name, and I treat this verse in detail, because the use of the word gives direct information about the Qurʾān's vocabulary.
Root: و-ح-ي. The root was analysed in detail at al-Najm, 53/4, and the same analysis was relied upon at al-Shūrā, 42/3. I rely on that treatment and bring its definition over here:
"The concrete sense of the root: swift and hidden communication. The definition the lexicographers give joins two features of the word — speed and concealment. To convey by a sign, by a whisper, by the short way." "There is no 'sacredness' at the centre of the word; there is speed and concealment." (The same note was entered in al-Zilzāl.)
And in the al-Najm section the field of the root's use was tabulated, and this verse was already named there. I complete the table from here:
| Place | To whom / from whom | How the waḥy takes place |
|---|---|---|
| Maryam 19/11 | Zechariah (Zakariyyā) → his people | Conveying by a sign — in the days when he could not speak |
| al-Naḥl 16/68 | God → the bee | A creature's knowing how it is to behave |
| al-Anʿām 6/112 | Satans → one another | The whispering of gilded speech |
| al-Shūrā 42/51 | God → man | Three channels: revelation, from behind a veil, a messenger |
| al-Najm 53/4 | God → the Prophet | Waḥyun yūḥā — verbal noun + verb, reinforced |
The conclusion recorded in the al-Najm section can be carried straight over here, and I repeat it: these usages show that the root does not carry the sense "prophethood". The root names only the manner of the communication: swift, direct, without an intermediary, most often by an unseen route.
Now I add what belongs here, and I record it as my own reading, its ground being the primary sense of the root:
| The feature of the root | Its counterpart in the bee |
|---|---|
| Concealment | The communication itself is invisible. What the bee knows is seen; how it knows is not |
| Speed | No process of learning, no trial and error is observed in between. The behaviour is there ready-made |
| Directness | No teacher, no book, no messenger comes to the bee |
The word, then, is used not in a figure but in its own primary sense. And this is a fact about language that must be recorded: because in English the word "revelation" is used only in the setting of prophecy, this verse reads oddly in English. In Arabic it does not — for the word names the character of the communication, not the one it is addressed to.
And I go no further than this: the verse names where the bee's knowledge comes from; it does not describe how it works.
| Command | Form | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| Ittakhidhī | Feminine singular imperative | Take |
| Kulī | Feminine singular imperative | Eat |
| Uslukī | Feminine singular imperative | Enter, travel |
al-Naḥl is a generic noun in Arabic that may be treated as masculine or as feminine; the verse chooses the feminine inflection. The lexicographers put this down to the word's being a generic noun and to the prevalence of the feminine usage.
And the verb's pronoun is singular, but the next sentence passes into the plural: yakhruju min buṭūnihā — "from their bellies". The lexicographers explain this by the distinction between the form and the sense of a generic noun.
| Order | Command | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ittakhidhī … buyūtā | Shelter — the house first |
| 2 | Kulī min kulli'l-thamarāt | Feeding |
| 3 | Uslukī subula rabbiki dhululā | The road — the return |
| — | Yakhruju min buṭūnihā sharāb | The outcome — not a command but a statement |
I record this as an observation about the word order: three commands are given, and the fourth sentence is not a command. The coming forth of the honey is not commanded — it is announced as the outcome of the three commands.
عَرْش, root ع-ر-ش: to raise, to put up a roof, to build a trellis. ʿArsh — a raised throne; ʿarīsh — a vine trellis.
And the pronoun must be recorded: yaʿrishūn — plural, third person, human beings. The third kind of house is thus what men build.
I give this as an observation: the verse enumerates three shelters — mountain, tree, and human construction. Man is not outside the order the verse sets out; he is named as an item within it.
سَلَكَ — root س-ل-ك: to enter upon a way, to be threaded into something. Silk — a string, to thread on a string.
ذُلُلًا — root ذ-ل-ل: to submit, to be docile. The plural of dhalūl; it is used of a tame, broken-in animal — dābbatun dhalūl, a beast easy to ride.
| Reading | Whose state dhululan describes | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The state of the subul | The ways are made submissive — smoothed for the bee |
| 2 | The state of the bee | The bee submitting — it enters in obedience |
And a connection can be made with al-Ḥujurāt, and I give it as an observation: dākhirūn (bowed low) occurred in the forty-eighth verse — of the shadows and of those who prostrate. Here dhulul occurs — of the bee. Both words carry the same idea, and the sūra sets them twenty verses apart.
The construction mukhtalifun alwānuhū occurs for the second time in the sūra (in the thirteenth verse wa mā dharaʾa lakum fi'l-arḍi mukhtalifan alwānuh occurred). And at Fāṭir, 35/27-28, it had been repeated three times.
| # | Place | Expression | Whose colours |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Fāṭir 35/27 | Thamarātin mukhtalifan alwānuhā | Plant |
| 2 | Fāṭir 35/27 | Judadun bīḍun wa ḥumrun mukhtalifun alwānuhā | Stone |
| 3 | Fāṭir 35/28 | Mina'l-nāsi wa'l-dawābbi wa'l-anʿāmi mukhtalifun alwānuhū | Living creature |
| 4 | al-Naḥl 16/13 | Wa mā dharaʾa lakum fi'l-arḍi mukhtalifan alwānuh | Everything strewn on the earth |
| 5 | al-Naḥl 16/69 | Sharābun mukhtalifun alwānuhū | What a living creature produces |
And the fifth link stands apart from the rest. I record this as my own reading, its ground being the list itself: in the first four links the diversity is in the created thing itself — fruit, stone, living creature, what is strewn on the earth. In the fifth link the diversity is in what a living creature produces.
The construction thus passes from direct creation to an intermediary. And the conclusion recorded at Fāṭir, 35/28 — three distinct domains, one shared attribute: diversity — goes one step further here: in products as well.
And in Fāṭir this threesome was followed by innamā yakhsha'llāha min ʿibādihi'l-ʿulamāʾ — the conclusion of a list of observations. In al-Naḥl what follows is li-qawmin yatafakkarūn. The two sūras tie the same fact to two different capacities: the one to knowing, the other to thinking.
Care is needed here, and per the method (Method) the limit must be set openly.
شِفَآء — root ش-ف-ي: to be healed; and to come to the edge, to the brink of a thing. Shafā — an edge, a brink (in the Qurʾān, shafā ḥufratin — the brink of a pit). The lexicographers join the two branches: shifāʾ is to come to the edge of an illness and to pass beyond it.
The wording of the verse is this, and nothing is added to it: fīhi shifāʾun li'l-nās — "in it there is healing for people."
| What | Its warrant in the verse | What it does not say |
|---|---|---|
| Fīhi — "in it" | Healing is named as something inside the drink | It does not say "it is a healing" |
| Shifāʾun — indefinite | Not the healing, but a healing | It does not say "a healing for every disease" |
| Li'l-nās — for people | The scope is mankind | Which disease, in what measure — is not said |
These three notes are the textual barrier against turning the verse into a medical claim. The sentence is not a prescription; it is a nominal sentence with an indefinite noun.
And the classical exegetes too have differed over the scope of this expression. The disagreement must be set out in a table:
| View | What the pronoun fīhi refers to | The scope of the shifāʾ |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Honey (sharāb) | For certain diseases — the indefinite noun shows this |
| 2 | Honey | A general attribute of healing |
| 3 | The Qurʾān — or the whole account in the preceding sentence | A healing of the heart |
The third view is a minority one and is weak in point of word order — the nearest referent is sharāb. But it is transmitted, and I record it. I do not impose a preference.
And no medical ruling is issued in this commentary. The wording of the verse says that there is a benefit in a substance; for which disease, in what measure, on what condition — none of this is in the verse, and none of it is written here.
As my own reading I record only this, its ground being the closing of the verse: having said fīhi shifāʾun li'l-nās, the sentence does not stop — inna fī dhālika la-āyatan li-qawmin yatafakkarūn. The verse itself turns the attention from the honey to thinking. And the word used in the sixty-sixth verse should be recalled: ʿibra — the place where one crosses.
I give this as an observation: the sūra has a hundred and twenty-eight verses, and within it are prophetic narratives, rulings, parables, history. It takes its name from a passage about a bee two verses long.
And that passage stands in the very middle of the sūra's enumeration of favours. The naming thus points to the sūra's backbone: an item from within the enumeration has become the name of the whole.
وَٱللَّهُ خَلَقَكُمْ ثُمَّ يَتَوَفَّىٰكُمْ وَمِنكُم مَّن يُرَدُّ إِلَىٰٓ أَرْذَلِ ٱلْعُمُرِ لِكَىْ لَا يَعْلَمَ بَعْدَ عِلْمٍ شَيْـًٔا إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَلِيمٌ قَدِيرٌ
Wa'llāhu khalaqakum thumma yatawaffākum, wa minkum man yuraddu ilā ardhali'l-ʿumuri li-kay lā yaʿlama baʿda ʿilmin shayʾā, inna'llāha ʿalīmun qadīr
"God created you, then He takes you. And some of you are sent back to the most abject stage of life, so that after knowing they should know nothing. God is knowing, all-powerful."
The root ر-ذ-ل was treated at al-Shuʿarāʾ, 26/111 (wa'ttabaʿaka'l-ardhalūn): what is worthless, low, of no use in a thing; ardhal — the elative: the lowest. And this verse was already named there. I rely on that treatment.
And at al-Tīn, 95/5 (thumma radadnāhu asfala sāfilīn), this verse was used in a table of disagreement as evidence for one of the readings: the sense of the verb radda as "turning back, returning" and its use in this verse were recorded there. I rely on that treatment.
What belongs here is that the sentence is built on the axis of knowledge, and this must be recorded:
And this has a counterpart within the sūra. The seventy-eighth verse will build the same axis from the other end: wa'llāhu akhrajakum min buṭūni ummahātikum lā taʿlamūna shayʾā.
| Verse | Expression | Direction |
|---|---|---|
| 70 | Lā yaʿlama baʿda ʿilmin shayʾā | From knowledge to unknowing — at the end of life |
| 78 | Lā taʿlamūna shayʾā | From unknowing, the beginning — at the start of life |
This is an overlap verifiable within the sūra, and eight verses stand between the two. I record this as my own reading: the sūra bounds a human life at both ends with the same word (shayʾā — nothing at all). At the beginning nothing is known; at the end what was known is taken back. And what is given in between will be enumerated in the seventy-eighth verse: hearing, eyes, hearts.
At al-Rūm, 30/54, the three stages of life (weakness → strength → weakness and grey hair) were treated and compared with the six steps at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), 40/67. I rely on that treatment and record the difference here: al-Rūm and Ghāfir measure the stages by the body; al-Naḥl by knowledge.
وَٱللَّهُ فَضَّلَ بَعْضَكُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ فِى ٱلرِّزْقِ فَمَا ٱلَّذِينَ فُضِّلُوا۟ بِرَآدِّى رِزْقِهِمْ عَلَىٰ مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُمْ فَهُمْ فِيهِ سَوَآءٌ أَفَبِنِعْمَةِ ٱللَّهِ يَجْحَدُونَ
Wa'llāhu faḍḍala baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍin fi'l-rizq, fa-ma'lladhīna fuḍḍilū bi-rāddī rizqihim ʿalā mā malakat aymānuhum fa-hum fīhi sawāʾ, a-fa-bi-niʿmati'llāhi yajḥadūn
"God has favoured some of you over others in provision. Those who are favoured do not hand their provision over to those their right hands possess, so as to be their equals in it. Do they then knowingly deny God's favour?"
| Step | Expression | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Faḍḍala baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍin fi'l-rizq | The fact: provision is not distributed equally |
| 2 | Fa-ma'lladhīna fuḍḍilū bi-rāddī rizqihim… | The observation: the favoured man does not share his advantage and level himself with the others |
| 3 | A-fa-bi-niʿmati'llāhi yajḥadūn | The question |
| Reading | The work of the parable |
|---|---|
| 1 | The contradiction of associating partners: the man who accepts no partner in his own property accepts partners in God's dominion |
| 2 | The denial of the favour: the advantage given is not shared, and the giver is met with ingratitude besides |
The first reading has a ground outside the verse, and it must be recorded: at al-Rūm, 30/28, a parable of exactly the same logic occurs (hal lakum min mā malakat aymānukum min shurakāʾa fī mā razaqnākum fa-antum fīhi sawāʾ) and was treated there. The two verses use the same words: mā malakat aymānukum, fī mā razaqnākum, fa-antum fīhi sawāʾ. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
| al-Rūm 30/28 | al-Naḥl 16/71 | |
|---|---|---|
| The kind of sentence | A question — hal lakum … min shurakāʾa | A statement — fa-mā … bi-rāddī |
| What is asked | Would you accept partners? | (no question is put; a fact is announced) |
| The closing | Ka-dhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿqilūn | A-fa-bi-niʿmati'llāhi yajḥadūn |
I record this as my own reading, its ground being the difference of the closings: al-Rūm ends the example with a call to reason; al-Naḥl ties the same example to an accounting of favour. The sūra draws a shared parable onto its own backbone.
The root was treated at al-Aḥqāf, 46/26, and the connection the lexicographers record was given there: arḍun juḥād — barren, arid ground. Denial is thus described not as ignorance but as a ground that does not give back what it has taken. I rely on that treatment.
And I record that the word falls very much in its place here: juḥūd is denial against knowledge. And the subject of the verse is the denial of the source of an advantage that is known. The eighty-third verse will say this outright: yaʿrifūna niʿmata'llāhi thumma yunkirūnahā — "they recognise it, then they deny it."
وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَزْوَٰجًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَزْوَٰجِكُم بَنِينَ وَحَفَدَةً وَرَزَقَكُم مِّنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ أَفَبِٱلْبَٰطِلِ يُؤْمِنُونَ وَبِنِعْمَتِ ٱللَّهِ هُمْ يَكْفُرُونَ
Wa'llāhu jaʿala lakum min anfusikum azwājan wa jaʿala lakum min azwājikum banīna wa ḥafadatan wa razaqakum mina'l-ṭayyibāt, a-fa-bi'l-bāṭili yuʾminūna wa bi-niʿmati'llāhi hum yakfurūn
"God made for you spouses of your own kind, and from your spouses He gave you sons and grandsons, and He provided you with wholesome things. Do they then believe in what is false and deny God's favour?"
The construction was treated at al-Rūm, 30/21 (an khalaqa lakum min anfusikum azwājan li-taskunū ilayhā), and the disagreement was tabulated there: "of the same kind, or of the same stock". I rely on that treatment.
The difference that belongs here must be recorded, and the two verses do not arrive at the same place:
| al-Rūm 30/21 | al-Naḥl 16/72 | |
|---|---|---|
| What follows | Li-taskunū ilayhā wa jaʿala baynakum mawaddatan wa raḥma | Wa jaʿala lakum min azwājikum banīna wa ḥafada |
| What it is tied to | The character of the relation — rest, love, mercy | The continuation of the line — children, grandchildren |
| The closing | La-āyātin li-qawmin yatafakkarūn | A-fa-bi'l-bāṭili yuʾminūn |
I record this as an observation: al-Rūm names the pairing by way of an inward state; al-Naḥl by way of a continuation. The two verses take hold of the same fact at two different points, and both are enumerated as favours.
The concrete sense of the root: to serve swiftly, to bustle about, to hurry to another's help. Ḥafada — he was quick in service.
| View | Who the ḥafada are | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Grandchildren | That it comes after banīn; the order of the generations |
| 2 | Those who serve, helpers | The primary sense of the root — service performed at a run |
| 3 | Sons-in-law / a wife's earlier children | A usage transmitted by some lexicographers |
And the sense of the root lends the second view a certain appeal — but the first is the more established in point of word order. I give this as an observation, not as a preference.
| Verb | Its object |
|---|---|
| Yuʾminūn — to believe | Bi'l-bāṭil — in what is false |
| Yakfurūn — to deny | Bi-niʿmati'llāh — God's favour |
I record this as an observation about the word order: the two verbs have changed places. The verb of believing is turned towards what is empty, the verb of denying towards what is real. The sentence does not state this separately; it shows it by the arrangement.
بَٰطِل — root ب-ط-ل: to come to nothing, to be void, to vanish. The lexicographers record the root's sense of "what is not fixed, what cannot keep its footing".
وَيَعْبُدُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا يَمْلِكُ لَهُمْ رِزْقًا مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ شَيْـًٔا وَلَا يَسْتَطِيعُونَ · فَلَا تَضْرِبُوا۟ لِلَّهِ ٱلْأَمْثَالَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَعْلَمُ وَأَنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
Wa yaʿbudūna min dūni'llāhi mā lā yamliku lahum rizqan mina'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi shayʾan wa lā yastaṭīʿūn · Fa-lā taḍribū li'llāhi'l-amthāl, inna'llāha yaʿlamu wa antum lā taʿlamūn
"And they serve, besides God, things that hold no provision for them from the heavens or the earth, and have no power to. · So do not coin likenesses for God. God knows, and you do not know."
This verse must be read with care, because immediately afterwards the sūra will give two parables (75-76).
What is forbidden is not the making of parables; it is the coining of likenesses for God — that is, the attempt to describe Him by a comparison, to fit Him into a mould.
And the evidence for this is what comes two verses later: ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan — "God has coined a likeness." Coining a likeness is not forbidden; coining one about God is.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that these verses stand back to back: the verse marks in advance by whom the parables of the seventy-fifth and seventy-sixth verses are framed. When the agent changes, the ruling changes too.
The same principle was recorded at al-Rūm, 30/27 (wa lahu'l-mathalu'l-aʿlā fi'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ), and the same construction occurred in the sixtieth verse of this sūra (wa li'llāhi'l-mathalu'l-aʿlā). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
ضَرَبَ ٱللَّهُ مَثَلًا عَبْدًا مَّمْلُوكًا لَّا يَقْدِرُ عَلَىٰ شَىْءٍ وَمَن رَّزَقْنَٰهُ مِنَّا رِزْقًا حَسَنًا فَهُوَ يُنفِقُ مِنْهُ سِرًّا وَجَهْرًا هَلْ يَسْتَوُۥنَ ٱلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ بَلْ أَكْثَرُهُمْ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ
Ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan ʿabdan mamlūkan lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾin wa man razaqnāhu minnā rizqan ḥasanan fa-huwa yunfiqu minhu sirran wa jahrā, hal yastawūn, al-ḥamdu li'llāh, bal aktharuhum lā yaʿlamūn
"God has coined a likeness: a slave owned by another, with power over nothing; and a man to whom We have given a good provision from Ourselves, and who spends of it in secret and openly. Are they equal? Praise belongs to God. No, most of them do not know."
| Side | Attribute | His act |
|---|---|---|
| ʿAbdan mamlūkā | Owned by another | Lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾ — he has power over nothing |
| Man razaqnāhu … rizqan ḥasanā | Given to him | Yunfiqu minhu sirran wa jahrā — he spends |
And at the axis of the contrast there is one word: power. The first lā yaqdiru, the second is in fact spending. The comparison is thus built not on ownership but on the power to dispose.
سِرًّا وَجَهْرًا — at al-Baqara, 2/271, it was treated that both secret and open giving are counted lawful, and at Fāṭir, 35/29, it was recorded that the two are named with a wāw, no distinction being drawn. I rely on those treatments. Here too they are named together with a wāw.
وَضَرَبَ ٱللَّهُ مَثَلًا رَّجُلَيْنِ أَحَدُهُمَآ أَبْكَمُ لَا يَقْدِرُ عَلَىٰ شَىْءٍ وَهُوَ كَلٌّ عَلَىٰ مَوْلَىٰهُ أَيْنَمَا يُوَجِّههُّ لَا يَأْتِ بِخَيْرٍ هَلْ يَسْتَوِى هُوَ وَمَن يَأْمُرُ بِٱلْعَدْلِ وَهُوَ عَلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ
Wa ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan rajulayni aḥaduhumā abkamu lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾin wa huwa kallun ʿalā mawlāhu, aynamā yuwajjihhu lā yaʾti bi-khayr, hal yastawī huwa wa man yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadli wa huwa ʿalā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm
"God has coined another likeness: two men. One of them is mute and has power over nothing; he is a burden to his master, and wherever he is sent he brings back nothing good. Is he equal to one who enjoins justice and is himself upon a straight path?"
| al-Zumar 39/29 | al-Naḥl 16/75 | al-Naḥl 16/76 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| The two sides | Rajulan fīhi shurakāʾu mutafākisūn / wa rajulan salaman li-rajul | ʿAbdan mamlūkā / man razaqnāh | Abkam / man yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadl |
| The axis of distinction | How many owners — many / one | Power of disposal — absent / present | Speech and use — absent / present |
| The shared question | Hal yastawiyāni mathalā | Hal yastawūn | Hal yastawī |
| What it tells | The practical consequence of associating partners — confusion of direction | The use made of what is given | What is given turning towards another |
| Whom it looks at | The servant — whose condition is the better | The servant | The servant and those around him |
What was recorded in the al-Zumar section was this, and I take it as ground here: "The verse does not argue the theoretical falsity of plurality — it shows its practical consequence. A man with more than one owner cannot know whose measure to act by." The matter is thus taken out of a dispute about belief and made a question of direction.
al-Naḥl's two parables use the same method but arrive somewhere else. I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the axis of distinction in the three parables:
| The first parable (75) | The second parable (76) | |
|---|---|---|
| The condition of the deficient side | Lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾ — no power | Lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾ — the same expression |
| The defect added | (none) | Abkam — mute; kallun ʿalā mawlāh — a burden |
| The act of the other side | Yunfiqu — he spends | Yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadl — he enjoins justice |
| The attribute of the other side | Rizqan ḥasanā — what has been given him | ʿAlā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm — the road he stands on |
The shared expression must be recorded: lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾ occurs in both parables. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
And the difference is this: in the first parable the other side gives (property), in the second he speaks (justice). In two verses the sūra thus enumerates two kinds of benefit — the material and the spoken.
And the closing of the second parable prepares the ninetieth verse: wa man yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadl. The ninetieth will open with the same word: inna'llāha yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadli wa'l-iḥsān. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and it will be treated at that verse.
| Word | Root | The difference |
|---|---|---|
| أَخْرَس (akhras) | خ-ر-س | Mute from birth — the organ of speech is wanting |
| أَبْكَم (abkam) | ب-ك-م | The lexicographers mostly use it of one who cannot speak, or does not know how to speak; some say "both mute and without understanding" |
كَلّ — root ك-ل-ل: to grow weary, to grow blunt; and weight, a burden. Kalīl — blunt (of a knife), weary (of an eye). Here the word means "one who is a burden to another".
And the clause aynamā yuwajjihhu lā yaʾti bi-khayr must be recorded: tawjīh — to direct, to send somewhere. The verse says that the man can be directed, but that the directing yields no result.
A note required by the method (Method)
The evidence within the text is this: the parable compares its two sides by two attributes — on the one side lā yaqdiru ʿalā shayʾ and lā yaʾti bi-khayr, on the other yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadl. And the subject of the comparison is fixed by the context coming from the preceding verse: the condition of the things that are served (73: mā lā yamliku lahum rizqan … wa lā yastaṭīʿūn).
The object of the parable, then, is not a group of human beings but the position described in the seventy-third verse. And the same care was kept at al-Zukhruf, 43/18: there too it was recorded that a sentence built upon an attribute is not a ruling about those who bear that attribute. The same line is kept here.
وَلِلَّهِ غَيْبُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَمَآ أَمْرُ ٱلسَّاعَةِ إِلَّا كَلَمْحِ ٱلْبَصَرِ أَوْ هُوَ أَقْرَبُ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ
Wa li'llāhi ghaybu'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, wa mā amru'l-sāʿati illā ka-lamḥi'l-baṣari aw huwa aqrab, inna'llāha ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīr
"To God belongs the unseen of the heavens and the earth. And the matter of the Hour is only as the blink of an eye, or nearer still. God has power over everything."
لَمْح — root ل-م-ح: to glance quickly, to cast an eye, to flash. Lamḥa — a glance; lamaḥa'l-barq — the lightning flashed.
And the construction can be taken in two ways; the lexicographers record both: the blinking of an eye, or the time a glance takes. Both explanations are transmitted; in point of meaning there is no difference: the shortest span there is.
And the word must be recorded: aqrab — "nearer", not "shorter". The comparison is therefore made not by span of time but by distance.
I give this as my own reading, its ground being the word itself: the sentence measures not the speed of the Hour but its distance. And this closes a ring with the sūra's first verse: atā amru'llāh — it has come. The seventy-seventh verse says the same nearness in another word.
The root ق-ر-ب and the form iqtaraba were treated at al-Qamar, 54/1, and at al-Anbiyāʾ, 21/1; I rely on those treatments.
The root أ-م-ر occurs several times in the sūra and in several different tasks, and this is a structural sign:
| Verse | Expression | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Atā amru'llāh | The command that comes |
| 2 | Bi'l-rūḥi min amrih | The command that descends |
| 12 | Musakhkharātun bi-amrih | The command that holds the order |
| 33 | Aw yaʾtiya amru rabbik | The command that is awaited |
| 50 | Wa yafʿalūna mā yuʾmarūn | The command that is obeyed |
| 77 | Amru'l-sāʿa | The matter of the Hour |
| 90 | Inna'llāha yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadl | The justice that is commanded |
All seven occurrences can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: in the sūra the root is used on the cosmic plane (12), on the historical (1, 33, 77) and on the moral (50, 90). "Command" is thus the single word that binds three distinct layers of the sūra together.
وَٱللَّهُ أَخْرَجَكُم مِّنۢ بُطُونِ أُمَّهَٰتِكُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ شَيْـًٔا وَجَعَلَ لَكُمُ ٱلسَّمْعَ وَٱلْأَبْصَٰرَ وَٱلْأَفْـِٔدَةَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُونَ
Wa'llāhu akhrajakum min buṭūni ummahātikum lā taʿlamūna shayʾan wa jaʿala lakumu'l-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾida, laʿallakum tashkurūn
"God brought you out of the bellies of your mothers knowing nothing, and He gave you hearing, eyes and hearts — that you might give thanks."
This triad was treated at many places in this commentary, and a table of four links was drawn up at al-Sajda, 32/9. I rely on that treatment and widen the table from here:
| Place | Sentence | The work of the triad |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aḥqāf 46/26 | Wa jaʿalnā lahum samʿan wa abṣāran wa afʾidatan fa-mā aghnā ʿanhum… | Given — it availed nothing |
| al-Jāthiya 45/23 | Wa khatama ʿalā samʿihī wa qalbihī wa jaʿala ʿalā baṣarihī ghishāwa | Closed off — a seal and a veil |
| Fuṣṣilat 41/20 | Shahida ʿalayhim samʿuhum wa abṣāruhum wa julūduhum | They bore witness — the third is the skin |
| al-Sajda 32/9 | Wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūn | Given — little thanks given |
| al-Muʾminūn 23/78 | Wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakumu'l-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾida | Brought into being — constructed |
| al-Mulk 67/23 | Qul huwa'lladhī anshaʾakum wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūn | Given — little thanks given |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/36 | Inna'l-samʿa wa'l-baṣara wa'l-fuʾāda kullu ulāʾika kāna ʿanhu masʾūlā | Held to account |
| al-Naḥl 16/78 | Wa jaʿala lakum … laʿallakum tashkurūn | Given — thanks is hoped for |
In al-Muʾminūn this verse was named in the table of the distribution of the root ن-ش-أ within that sūra, and in al-Isrāʾ in the table of that sūra's structure; and at al-Mulk, 67/23, the question of singular and plural within the triad was treated in detail. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them.
The summary of what was recorded in the al-Mulk section is this: samʿ is singular, abṣār and afʾida plural; the soundest explanation is that samʿ stands in the verbal-noun form. The order runs from outside inward: two that gather, one that works upon what is gathered. And the choice of afʾida rather than qulūb suggests that what is given is not an organ but a centre of apprehension.
al-Naḥl's link is set apart from the others by one expression, and this is the most striking thing in the verse.
In the other seven occurrences the triad is named alone, or together with a concluding sentence. In al-Naḥl it comes with a note of state: lā taʿlamūna shayʾā — "knowing nothing at all."
| The other occurrences | al-Naḥl 16/78 | |
|---|---|---|
| What precedes the triad | A verb (jaʿala, anshaʾa, khatama) | A scene of coming out — akhrajakum min buṭūni ummahātikum |
| A note of state | (none) | Lā taʿlamūna shayʾā |
| The closing | Qalīlan mā tashkurūn (32/9, 67/23) — an accent on scarcity | Laʿallakum tashkurūn — an accent on hope |
One — the triad is enumerated after a starting point. In the other verses the faculties are named as given; here the condition before the giving is stated as well: knowing nothing at all. The verse shows the zero.
Two — the consequence is this: the triad is enumerated not as equipment but as a difference. Three doors are given to a being that comes out without knowledge. Where knowledge comes from is shown by the distance between the two halves of the sentence.
Three — the difference of the closing. al-Sajda and al-Mulk say qalīlan mā tashkurūn (little do you give thanks) — a rebuke. al-Naḥl says laʿallakum tashkurūn — a hope. And this agrees with the sūra as a whole: al-Naḥl is a sūra of an enumeration of favours, and the purpose of the enumeration will be said outright in the eighty-first verse.
| Verse | Expression | Where in the life |
|---|---|---|
| 78 | Akhrajakum … lā taʿlamūna shayʾā | The beginning — unknowing |
| — | Wa jaʿala lakumu'l-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾida | The middle — the faculties |
| 70 | Lā yaʿlama baʿda ʿilmin shayʾā | The end — knowledge taken back |
I record this as my own reading: the sūra describes a human life along the axis of knowledge and closes both its ends with the same word. And the middle step — the three doors — is precisely the name of the difference between those two ends.
أَلَمْ يَرَوْا۟ إِلَى ٱلطَّيْرِ مُسَخَّرَٰتٍ فِى جَوِّ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مَا يُمْسِكُهُنَّ إِلَّا ٱللَّهُ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَـَٔايَٰتٍ لِّقَوْمٍ يُؤْمِنُونَ
A-lam yaraw ila'l-ṭayri musakhkharātin fī jawwi'l-samāʾ, mā yumsikuhunna illa'llāh, inna fī dhālika la-āyātin li-qawmin yuʾminūn
"Have they not seen the birds, made subservient in the open air of the sky? None holds them up but God. In that there are signs for a people who believe."
The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. Its sense: the open space between earth and sky. The lexicographers describe jaww as "a wide space that is empty within".
And the construction must be recorded: fī jawwi'l-samāʾ — "in the open of the sky". The verse names the place where the bird flies an emptiness — the place where there is nothing to take hold of.
I give this as my own reading, its ground being the choice of word: the rest of the sentence is mā yumsikuhunna illa'llāh — "none holds them up but God." The word prepares the sentence's verb in advance: where there is nothing to take hold of, one asks who is holding.
The root of imsāk (holding) was the backbone of Fāṭir — it was tabulated there that at 35/2 (fa-lā mumsika lahā) and at 35/41 (inna'llāha yumsiku'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa an tazūlā) it bound the two ends of that sūra together. I rely on that treatment.
| Place | What is held | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| Fāṭir 35/2 | Mercy | Fa-lā mumsika lahā |
| Fāṭir 35/41 | The heavens and the earth | Yumsiku'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa an tazūlā |
| al-Naḥl 16/79 | Birds | Mā yumsikuhunna illa'llāh |
The difference of scale must be recorded, and I give it as an observation: Fāṭir tells of the hand that holds the universe; al-Naḥl uses the same verb of a bird. This suits the sūra's logic of enumeration: the evidence is chosen from close at hand.
And the same scene occurs at al-Mulk, 67/19 (a-wa-lam yaraw ila'l-ṭayri fawqahum ṣāffātin wa yaqbiḍna, mā yumsikuhunna illa'l-raḥmān) and was treated there. The two verses are almost identical, and the difference lies in a single word:
| al-Mulk 67/19 | al-Naḥl 16/79 | |
|---|---|---|
| Who holds | al-Raḥmān | Allāh |
| The bird's condition | Ṣāffātin wa yaqbiḍna — spreading and folding the wings | Musakhkharātin fī jawwi'l-samāʾ — made subservient |
| The closing | Innahū bi-kulli shayʾin baṣīr | La-āyātin li-qawmin yuʾminūn |
This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras. And the difference is worth recording: al-Mulk describes the bird's motion (the spreading and folding); al-Naḥl its condition (made subservient). al-Naḥl's word (musakhkharāt) is the very word used of the stars in the twelfth verse. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنۢ بُيُوتِكُمْ سَكَنًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّن جُلُودِ ٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ بُيُوتًا تَسْتَخِفُّونَهَا يَوْمَ ظَعْنِكُمْ وَيَوْمَ إِقَامَتِكُمْ وَمِنْ أَصْوَافِهَا وَأَوْبَارِهَا وَأَشْعَارِهَآ أَثَٰثًا وَمَتَٰعًا إِلَىٰ حِينٍ
Wa'llāhu jaʿala lakum min buyūtikum sakanan wa jaʿala lakum min julūdi'l-anʿāmi buyūtan tastakhiffūnahā yawma ẓaʿnikum wa yawma iqāmatikum, wa min aṣwāfihā wa awbārihā wa ashʿārihā athāthan wa matāʿan ilā ḥīn
"God made your houses a place of rest for you; and out of the hides of the livestock He made you houses light to carry on the day you strike camp and on the day you settle. And from their wool, their fur and their hair, furnishing and equipment for a time."
| House | Material | Quality |
|---|---|---|
| Min buyūtikum sakanā | A permanent structure | Sakan — rest, coming to a stand |
| Min julūdi'l-anʿāmi buyūtā | Of hide | Tastakhiffūnahā — light to carry |
سَكَن — root س-ك-ن: to come to a stand, to find stillness, to settle. The root was treated in detail at al-Rūm, 30/21 (li-taskunū ilayhā); I rely on that treatment. And what was recorded there was this: the word conveys not "the stopping of motion" but "finding a place to go and come to rest in".
And I give this as an observation: in al-Rūm the object of the verb sakana was a person (the spouses); in al-Naḥl it is a place. The same root, once in a human being, once in a place.
تَسْتَخِفُّونَهَا — root خ-ف-ف: lightness. In Form X (istakhaffa): to find light, to carry easily. The root was treated at al-Rūm, 30/60 (wa lā yastakhiffannak) — there in the sense "to make light of, to unsettle". Here the same form stands in its concrete sense: to carry easily.
I record this as an observation about the language: the same form yields two different senses in two sūras — the one moral (to make light of), the other physical (to find light). And both senses come out of the root's idea of "lightness".
The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. Its sense: to migrate, to move from one place to another. Ẓaʿīna — a woman travelling in a litter; the word is the name for migration in the desert.
And the verse sets two days against each other: yawma ẓaʿnikum wa yawma iqāmatikum — the day of striking camp and the day of settling.
I give this as an observation: in two words the verse sums up the addressee's whole order of life. And the favour given fits both orders at once — the tent is both carried and pitched.
| Word | Root | Which animal |
|---|---|---|
| صُوف (ṣūf) | ص-و-ف | Sheep's wool |
| وَبَر (wabar) | و-ب-ر | Camel hair |
| شَعْر (shaʿr) | ش-ع-ر | Goat hair |
That the three are enumerated separately is worth recording. The verse does not say "from the hair of the animals"; it names all three apart.
I give this as my own reading, its ground being this threefold naming: the enumeration divides its items instead of gathering them. And this is the practical counterpart of the ruling lā tuḥṣūhā in the eighteenth verse: if one item can be divided into three, counting is not a task that ends.
أَثَاثًا وَمَتَاعًا إِلَىٰ حِينٍ — athāth: household goods, bedding; root أ-ث-ث: a thing's being abundant and closely entangled. Matāʿ: what is made use of.
And a qualification must be recorded: ilā ḥīn — "for a time". A limit of time is thus set upon this item of the enumeration. And it belongs to the same family as ajalin musammā in the sūra's sixty-first verse.
وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّمَّا خَلَقَ ظِلَٰلًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنَ ٱلْجِبَالِ أَكْنَٰنًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُمْ سَرَٰبِيلَ تَقِيكُمُ ٱلْحَرَّ وَسَرَٰبِيلَ تَقِيكُم بَأْسَكُمْ كَذَٰلِكَ يُتِمُّ نِعْمَتَهُۥ عَلَيْكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُسْلِمُونَ
Wa'llāhu jaʿala lakum mimmā khalaqa ẓilālan wa jaʿala lakum mina'l-jibāli aknānan wa jaʿala lakum sarābīla taqīkumu'l-ḥarra wa sarābīla taqīkum baʾsakum, ka-dhālika yutimmu niʿmatahū ʿalaykum laʿallakum tuslimūn
"God made shade for you out of what He created; He made you shelters in the mountains; and He gave you garments that guard you from the heat, and coats that guard you in your own violence. Thus He completes His favour upon you — that you might submit."
The verse says jaʿala lakum four times (three in this verse, one in the eightieth) and at the end closes the whole enumeration with a single sentence.
| Order | What is given | Against what |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ẓilālan — shade | Against the sun |
| 2 | Aknānan — shelters | (not specified) |
| 3 | Sarābīla taqīkumu'l-ḥarr | Against the heat |
| 4 | Sarābīla taqīkum baʾsakum | Against your own violence |
The fourth item must be recorded, and it is the most striking thing in the verse: baʾsakum — "your own violence".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the pronoun itself: the first three items are against forces outside — the sun, the need for shelter, the heat. In the fourth the pronoun turns back upon the one addressed. In the last item of its enumeration of favours the sūra counts protection from what man does to man as a favour too.
And this agrees with the sūra as a whole: in the fourth verse man was named khaṣīmun mubīn (an open disputant). In the eighty-first, protection from where that disputing arrives is enumerated.
It must be recorded: in the forty-eighth verse the shadows were enumerated as a proof (yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū … sujjadan li'llāh). In the eighty-first the same word is enumerated as a favour.
| Verse | Ẓilāl | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| 48 | Yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū … sujjadā | Proof — the sign of submission |
| 81 | Jaʿala lakum mimmā khalaqa ẓilālā | Favour — protection |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and it is the sūra's characteristic movement: the same fact is enumerated twice, in two different columns. The same was done with water (10 and 65).
أَكْنَان — the plural of kinn, root ك-ن-ن: to cover, to hide, to protect. Maknūn — hidden (in the Qurʾān used of a pearl); kināna — a quiver. The word means "a place one goes inside and is hidden in".
سَرَابِيل — the plural of sirbāl: a shirt, a garment worn over. The lexicographers record that the word may have come into Arabic from another language; this is transmitted as a possibility, not as a settled ruling.
And the expression used of the second sarābīl must be recorded: taqīkum baʾsakum. The exegetes generally explain it as armour — indeed the making of armour is named elsewhere in the Qurʾān (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/80: wa ʿallamnāhu ṣanʿata labūsin lakum li-tuḥṣinakum min baʾsikum). The overlap with that verse is worth recording, and both verses use the same word: baʾsakum.
| Word | Root | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| Yutimmu | ت-م-م | He is completing — it goes on, it is not finished |
| Niʿmatahū | ن-ع-م | Singular — as in the eighteenth verse |
| Tuslimūn | س-ل-م | Submitting — the purpose |
And the verb must be recorded: yutimmu — imperfect. The completing is thus not a finished work; it goes on. This is directly connected with the ruling lā tuḥṣūhā (you cannot count them) in the eighteenth verse, and I give it as my own reading: the reason they cannot be counted is that the list is still lengthening.
And the verb of purpose differs from the sūra's closing verbs. All seven of the closings tabulated above were verbs of cognition or of faith (to think, to reason, to remember, to hear, to believe). This eighth is a verb of stance: tuslimūn — to submit.
The same distinction was recorded at al-Rūm, 30/46: the link that stood apart in the wa min āyātihī series ended with a verb of response (tashkurūn). In al-Naḥl the enumeration ends with a verb of submission.
I record this as my own reading, my ground being the series of verbs: the sūra begins its counting with thinking and ends it with submission. And seven distinct verbs are enumerated in between. The enumeration thus moves from an operation of knowledge towards a change of stance.
فَإِن تَوَلَّوْا۟ فَإِنَّمَا عَلَيْكَ ٱلْبَلَٰغُ ٱلْمُبِينُ · يَعْرِفُونَ نِعْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ ثُمَّ يُنكِرُونَهَا وَأَكْثَرُهُمُ ٱلْكَٰفِرُونَ
Fa-in tawallaw fa-innamā ʿalayka'l-balāghu'l-mubīn · Yaʿrifūna niʿmata'llāhi thumma yunkirūnahā wa aktharuhumu'l-kāfirūn
"If they turn away, nothing is laid upon you but plain delivery. · They recognise God's favour, then they deny it; and most of them are ungrateful."
| Verb | Root | What |
|---|---|---|
| Yaʿrifūn | ع-ر-ف | To recognise — to know, to be aware of |
| Yunkirūnahā | ن-ك-ر | To deny — to fail to recognise, to reject |
And the lexicographers count the two roots as opposites: maʿrifa and nakira. In Arabic a noun that is definite is called maʿrifa and one that is indefinite nakira — the same two roots.
The sentence thus sets two opposed verbs one after the other upon a single object: yaʿrifūna … thumma yunkirūnahā.
And the particle thumma must be recorded. In Arabic thumma conveys sequence and an interval — "then". The denial does not take the place of the recognising; it comes after it.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that particle: the verse does not describe a state of ignorance. The recognising has taken place, and then been rejected. And this coincides with the word yajḥadūn (denial in the face of knowledge) in the seventy-first verse — as was recorded at al-Aḥqāf, 46/26, ج-ح-د is denial against knowledge.
The whole enumeration of the sūra arrives at one place in this sentence: the trouble is not a failure to see the list; it is the rejecting of it after seeing.
And it can be compared with the diagnosis at al-Rūm, 30/7: there the fault was named yaʿlamūna ẓāhiran mina'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā — superficiality. Here something else is said.
| Sūra | Diagnosis | Where the trouble lies |
|---|---|---|
| al-Rūm 30/7 | Yaʿlamūna ẓāhiran | In the depth of the looking — remaining on the surface |
| al-Naḥl 16/83 | Yaʿrifūna … thumma yunkirūnahā | After the looking — refusing to accept |
This is a difference verifiable across the sūras, and I give it as my own reading: al-Rūm diagnoses the shallowness of the looking, al-Naḥl the step that comes after the looking. The two sūras catch the same fact at two different stages.
وَأَكْثَرُهُمُ ٱلْكَٰفِرُونَ — and the scope must be recorded. The verse does not say "all of them": aktharuhum — most. Per the method (Method) the ruling is tied not to a group but to an attribute, and the verse's own word keeps this.
وَيَوْمَ نَبْعَثُ مِن كُلِّ أُمَّةٍ شَهِيدًا ثُمَّ لَا يُؤْذَنُ لِلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَلَا هُمْ يُسْتَعْتَبُونَ · وَإِذَا رَءَا ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ فَلَا يُخَفَّفُ عَنْهُمْ وَلَا هُمْ يُنظَرُونَ · وَإِذَا رَءَا ٱلَّذِينَ أَشْرَكُوا۟ شُرَكَآءَهُمْ قَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَا هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ شُرَكَآؤُنَا ٱلَّذِينَ كُنَّا نَدْعُوا۟ مِن دُونِكَ فَأَلْقَوْا۟ إِلَيْهِمُ ٱلْقَوْلَ إِنَّكُمْ لَكَٰذِبُونَ
Wa yawma nabʿathu min kulli ummatin shahīdan thumma lā yuʾdhanu lilladhīna kafarū wa lā hum yustaʿtabūn · Wa idhā raʾa'lladhīna ẓalamu'l-ʿadhāba fa-lā yukhaffafu ʿanhum wa lā hum yunẓarūn · Wa idhā raʾa'lladhīna ashrakū shurakāʾahum qālū rabbanā hāʾulāʾi shurakāʾuna'lladhīna kunnā nadʿū min dūnik, fa-alqaw ilayhimu'l-qawla innakum la-kādhibūn
"On the day We raise up a witness from every community, no leave will be given to those who disbelieved, nor will they be asked to make amends. · When those who did wrong see the punishment, it will not be lightened for them, nor will they be granted respite. · When those who associated see the partners they associated, they will say: 'Our Lord, these are our partners, whom we used to call upon besides You.' And they will fling the word back at them: 'You are liars.'"
The word istiʿtāb was treated at Fuṣṣilat, 41/24, and the same root occurred at al-Rūm, 30/57. I rely on those treatments. The sense of the root: to remove a grievance, to win back goodwill; in Form X, to be asked to make amends.
| What closes | Expression |
|---|---|
| Leave to speak | Lā yuʾdhanu lilladhīna kafarū |
| The chance to make amends | Wa lā hum yustaʿtabūn |
The sense of the second note is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: the verse does not say "their excuses will not be accepted". It says "they will not be asked to make amends". What closes, then, is the stage before the door of excuse: the stage at which amends are called for.
The same verb (ل-ق-ي, Form IV) occurs for the third time in the sūra: in the fifteenth verse of the mountains (wa alqā fi'l-arḍi rawāsiya), in the twenty-eighth of surrender (fa-alqawu'l-salam), here of a word. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
And the picture of ilqāʾ here is worth recording: the word is not spoken, it is thrown. Like a thing hurled at the other party.
This threefold refusal was treated at Fāṭir, 35/13-14, and at al-Aḥqāf, 46/5-6; I rely on those treatments.
And the giving of the lie in the eighty-sixth verse must be recorded: innakum la-kādhibūn — to whom is it said? The lexicographers record that it is said by those who were served to those who served them. And what is given the lie is the claim of attribution in the preceding sentence — the words "these were our partners".
وَأَلْقَوْا۟ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ يَوْمَئِذٍ ٱلسَّلَمَ وَضَلَّ عَنْهُم مَّا كَانُوا۟ يَفْتَرُونَ · ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَصَدُّوا۟ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ زِدْنَٰهُمْ عَذَابًا فَوْقَ ٱلْعَذَابِ بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يُفْسِدُونَ
Wa alqaw ila'llāhi yawmaʾidhini'l-salama wa ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn · Alladhīna kafarū wa ṣaddū ʿan sabīli'llāhi zidnāhum ʿadhāban fawqa'l-ʿadhābi bimā kānū yufsidūn
"On that day they will offer their surrender to God, and what they used to invent will be lost to them. · Those who disbelieved and turned others from the way of God — We shall add punishment upon punishment for the corruption they wrought."
The same expression occurred in the twenty-eighth verse: fa-alqawu'l-salam. In the eighty-seventh a word is added: ila'llāh.
| Verse | Expression | To whom the surrender |
|---|---|---|
| 28 | Fa-alqawu'l-salam | Not specified — a defence follows it |
| 87 | Wa alqaw ila'llāhi yawmaʾidhini'l-salam | To God — no defence |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being the added word: in the twenty-eighth verse a denial followed the surrender (mā kunnā naʿmalu min sūʾ). In the eighty-seventh none follows. The scene shows the same act in its completed form.
The sentence had enumerated two acts — kafarū and ṣaddū — but as its ground it gives a third word: ifsād.
I give this as an observation: the added punishment is tied not to the denial itself but to the side of it that touches another. Ṣaddū ʿan sabīli'llāh — "to turn others from the way of God" — is already an act that concerns someone else. And the word ifsād names it.
The same distinction was made in the twenty-fifth verse (wa min awzāri'lladhīna yuḍillūnahum): a man's own burden and the burden of leading astray were enumerated separately. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
وَيَوْمَ نَبْعَثُ فِى كُلِّ أُمَّةٍ شَهِيدًا عَلَيْهِم مِّنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ وَجِئْنَا بِكَ شَهِيدًا عَلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ وَنَزَّلْنَا عَلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ تِبْيَٰنًا لِّكُلِّ شَىْءٍ وَهُدًى وَرَحْمَةً وَبُشْرَىٰ لِلْمُسْلِمِينَ
Wa yawma nabʿathu fī kulli ummatin shahīdan ʿalayhim min anfusihim wa jiʾnā bika shahīdan ʿalā hāʾulāʾ, wa nazzalnā ʿalayka'l-kitāba tibyānan li-kulli shayʾin wa hudan wa raḥmatan wa bushrā li'l-muslimīn
"On the day We raise up in every community a witness against them from among themselves, and bring you as a witness against these. And We have sent down to you the Book as an exposition of everything, a guidance, a mercy, and glad tidings for those who submit."
| Verse 84 | Verse 89 | |
|---|---|---|
| The particle | Nabʿathu min kulli ummatin | Nabʿathu fī kulli ummatin |
| The qualification | (none) | ʿAlayhim min anfusihim |
| What follows | The scene of punishment | Wa jiʾnā bika shahīdan |
| The closing | Lā hum yustaʿtabūn | The qualities of the Book |
The difference of particle must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: min conveys "from among"; fī conveys "within". Both particles give a sense close to the same thing, but the second stresses the witness's being inside the community.
And the eighty-ninth verse says this outright: min anfusihim — "from among themselves". The witness, then, is not someone brought in from outside.
The construction is the third and last link of the sūra's ب-ي-ن series (39, 44, 89). It was tabulated above.
And the form of the word must be recorded: tibyān — a verbal noun on the tifʿāl pattern. The lexicographers record that this pattern conveys intensification: tibyān is the fullest form of making clear.
The exegetes differ over the scope of the construction, and the disagreement must be set out in a table:
| View | What li-kulli shayʾ covers |
|---|---|
| 1 | Religious rulings and the knowledge that is needed — the context requires it |
| 2 | Everything that concerns guidance — everything within the Book's own subject |
| 3 | Absolute scope — with no limit set |
But a note must be entered in point of word order, and I give it as an observation: the word tibyān does not stand alone in the sentence; three further qualities follow it — hudan, raḥmatan, bushrā. And all three look towards a definite field: guiding, mercy, glad tidings. Read together with the three words beside it, the scope of the construction narrows. This is an observation; it is not a preference within the disagreement.
| Quality | What | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| Tibyānan li-kulli shayʾ | Exposition | (unqualified) |
| Wa hudan | Guidance | (unqualified) |
| Wa raḥmatan | Mercy | (unqualified) |
| Wa bushrā | Glad tidings | Li'l-muslimīn — qualified |
Only the last has its addressee named. I give this as an observation: exposition, guidance and mercy are unqualified; the glad tidings are for those who submit. The first three are thus left open to everyone.
And the sixty-fourth verse had a shorter form of the same sequence: wa hudan wa raḥmatan li-qawmin yuʾminūn. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and here one further quality is added.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَأْمُرُ بِٱلْعَدْلِ وَٱلْإِحْسَٰنِ وَإِيتَآئِ ذِى ٱلْقُرْبَىٰ وَيَنْهَىٰ عَنِ ٱلْفَحْشَآءِ وَٱلْمُنكَرِ وَٱلْبَغْىِ يَعِظُكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ
Inna'llāha yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadli wa'l-iḥsāni wa ītāʾi dhi'l-qurbā wa yanhā ʿani'l-faḥshāʾi wa'l-munkari wa'l-baghy, yaʿiẓukum laʿallakum tadhakkarūn
"God commands justice, doing good, and giving to kinsfolk; and He forbids indecency, what is wrong, and oppression. He admonishes you — that you may take heed."
| What is commanded | Root | What is forbidden | Root | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | al-ʿAdl — equivalence | ع-د-ل | al-Faḥshāʾ — indecency | ف-ح-ش |
| 2 | al-Iḥsān — the surplus | ح-س-ن | al-Munkar — what is not acknowledged | ن-ك-ر |
| 3 | Ītāʾu dhi'l-qurbā — giving to kinsfolk | أ-ت-ي / ق-ر-ب | al-Baghy — overstepping | ب-غ-ي |
And the symmetry is not only in number but in order. I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the reading of the two lists against each other:
The commands run from the general to the particular: justice (to everyone), iḥsān (to everyone, but with more than is due), giving to kinsfolk (to a definite circle). The prohibitions run from the particular to the general: faḥshāʾ (concerning a man himself and those close to him), munkar (what the society does not acknowledge), baghy (spilling over into another's domain).
The two lists thus run in opposite directions and meet in the middle. I do not rest this reading on a transmitted report; my ground is the scope of the words.
I treat this difference in detail, because the relation between the verse's first two words carries the weight of the whole sentence.
عَدْل — root ع-د-ل. The root was treated at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9, and compared there with qisṭ. I rely on that treatment and take over its note:
"عَدْل — root ع-د-ل. Its primary sense is to make even, to equalise, to set straight. The two pans of a balance coming level. Taʿdīl — correcting, evening out."
And another derivative of the root bears out this picture: ʿadl also means "the equivalent of a thing" — in the Qurʾān it has the sense of "an equal recompense" in usages such as aw ʿadlu dhālika ṣiyāmā (al-Māʾida 5/95). At the centre of the word, then, stands equivalence.
إِحْسَان — root ح-س-ن. The root was treated at al-Mulk, 67/2, and at al-Sajda, 32/7. The note there:
"Beneath the root lies the idea of fitness and aptness: ḥasan is a thing's being as it ought to be. Iḥsān comes from the same root and means 'to do a work giving it its full due'."
| عَدْل | إِحْسَان | |
|---|---|---|
| The picture in the root | A balance — the two pans level | Beauty / aptness — giving a thing its due |
| Its measure | As much as is owed — neither less nor more | More than is owed, or with nothing owed |
| Can it be demanded | Yes — it is claimed as a right | No — it is not demanded, it is given |
| Its absence | Injustice | Not injustice — only the absence of the surplus |
| Its form | Triliteral — ʿadala | Form IV — aḥsana; transitive, directed at another |
The difference of form must be recorded, and it is an observation about the language: iḥsān is of Form IV, and in Arabic this form conveys the carrying of the act over to another. Aḥsana ilayhi — he did him good. Even in the pattern of the word, then, there is a movement "towards another".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that order: iḥsān does not take the place of justice — it is laid on top of it. The surplus is meaningful only after the equivalence has been provided. A surplus given without the equivalence becomes a cover for a right left unpaid.
And at al-Shūrā, 42/40-43, these two steps were treated by way of another pair — mithl (an equal recompense) and ʿafw (pardon). The pattern recorded there is the same: the right is measured, the surplus is left unmeasured. The two verses build the same structure with two different pairs of words:
| Sūra | What is measured | What is unmeasured |
|---|---|---|
| al-Shūrā 42/40 | Sayyiʾatun mithluhā — an equal recompense | Fa-ajruhū ʿala'llāh — pardon |
| al-Naḥl 16/90 | al-ʿAdl — equivalence | al-Iḥsān — the surplus |
The construction was treated at al-Rūm, 30/38, and at al-Isrāʾ, 17/26 (fa-āti dha'l-qurbā ḥaqqah), and the word ḥaqqahū was dwelt on there: what is given is not a gift but a right. I rely on those treatments.
The difference here must be recorded: al-Rūm and al-Isrāʾ say ḥaqqahū; al-Naḥl does not. Here, then, the command is laid down not as the paying of a right but as the act of giving.
ف-ح-ش — root: an ugliness that exceeds measure. Fāḥish — excessive, going past the bound. The root was treated in al-Nūr and at al-Isrāʾ, 17/32; I do not repeat it here.
ن-ك-ر — what is not recognised, what is found strange. And the word has already occurred twice in the sūra: qulūbuhum munkira (their hearts are in denial) in the twenty-second verse, thumma yunkirūnahā (then they deny it) in the eighty-third. In the ninetieth the same root returns as a moral category: al-munkar.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and I record this as my own reading: in the sūra the same root occurs first as the state of a heart, then as the name of an act, and finally as a forbidden category. The act of "not recognising" thus widens from inside outwards through the sūra.
ب-غ-ي — to overstep the bound, to overflow, to pass into another's domain. The root was tabulated throughout al-Shūrā and was treated at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9 (fa-in baghat iḥdāhumā). I rely on those treatments. And the line recorded at al-Shūrā 42/42 holds here too: the ruling is tied not to a group but to an act.
The root و-ع-ظ: speech that softens the heart and calls consequences to mind. And the word will return once more in the hundred and twenty-fifth verse, as the second item of the method of calling: wa'l-mawʿiẓati'l-ḥasana. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
I record this as my own reading: the ninetieth verse enumerates six rulings and at the end calls them not a command but an admonition. And in the hundred and twenty-fifth the same word will be the name of the task given to the one addressed. The sūra thus names the work it is itself doing, and hands that same work over to the one addressed.
وَأَوْفُوا۟ بِعَهْدِ ٱللَّهِ إِذَا عَٰهَدتُّمْ وَلَا تَنقُضُوا۟ ٱلْأَيْمَٰنَ بَعْدَ تَوْكِيدِهَا وَقَدْ جَعَلْتُمُ ٱللَّهَ عَلَيْكُمْ كَفِيلًا إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَعْلَمُ مَا تَفْعَلُونَ · وَلَا تَكُونُوا۟ كَٱلَّتِى نَقَضَتْ غَزْلَهَا مِنۢ بَعْدِ قُوَّةٍ أَنكَٰثًا تَتَّخِذُونَ أَيْمَٰنَكُمْ دَخَلًۢا بَيْنَكُمْ أَن تَكُونَ أُمَّةٌ هِىَ أَرْبَىٰ مِنْ أُمَّةٍ
Wa awfū bi-ʿahdi'llāhi idhā ʿāhadtum wa lā tanquḍu'l-aymāna baʿda tawkīdihā wa qad jaʿaltumu'llāha ʿalaykum kafīlā, inna'llāha yaʿlamu mā tafʿalūn · Wa lā takūnū ka'llatī naqaḍat ghazlahā min baʿdi quwwatin ankāthā, tattakhidhūna aymānakum dakhalan baynakum an takūna ummatun hiya arbā min umma
"Fulfil God's covenant when you have made a covenant, and do not break your oaths after they have been made fast — you have made God a surety over you. God knows what you do. · And do not be like the woman who unravelled her yarn into loose shreds after it had been spun strong: you make your oaths a means of deceit among yourselves, because one community is more numerous than another."
The concrete sense of the root: to undo something plaited, twisted, made firm. Naqaḍa'l-ḥabl — he untwisted the rope; naqīḍ — undone. The lexicographers record a sense of sound in the root as well: naqīḍ, the cracking of the joints — that is, the sound of a bond giving way.
And that the word is used together with ʿahd shows that the language carries within it an image of weaving. The same image is present in the root ن-ك-ث and was treated at al-Fatḥ, 48/10. I rely on that treatment and take its note over here:
"The concrete sense of the root: to open up again, to unravel a thread that has been spun and twisted. In the dictionaries nikth is used of wool or hair that has been unravelled: spun, then picked apart." "'Breaking a covenant', then, carries within the language an image of weaving. To give one's word is to spin a thread; to break one's word is to unpick the thread that was spun." "And this image is worth recording: an unpicked thread does not return to what it was before. The crimp stays, the strength goes. A broken undertaking is different from an undertaking never given — it leaves something behind."
In the al-Fatḥ section the image was recorded as an inference. In al-Naḥl the same image is built openly by the verse itself.
I treat this parable in detail, because it is one of the most concrete comparisons in the Qurʾān and its whole weight is gathered into three words.
| Word | Root | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| Naqaḍat | ن-ق-ض | She unravelled — she unpicked what had been spun |
| Ghazl | غ-ز-ل | Spun yarn — wool twisted on the spindle |
| Min baʿdi quwwatin | ق-و-ي | After it had been made strong |
| Ankāthā | ن-ك-ث | Unpicked shreds of fibre — plural |
One — the work has been done. The wool has been spun, made into yarn. The word ghazl names it: the product of the spinning.
Two — the work has been made firm. Min baʿdi quwwatin — "after it was strengthened". The yarn was not merely spun; it was tightened, made durable. And this note coincides with the word in the preceding verse: baʿda tawkīdihā (after they had been made fast). The two verses build the same structure: a thing is made firm, then broken.
Four — and what is taken back does not return to its first condition. Ankāthā — unpicked shreds of fibre. The wool is no longer the wool it was before the spinning; nor is it yarn. A third thing has come to be in between: waste.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is that the word ankāthā is plural: the verse does not say "she unravelled it" and stop. It says besides what the unravelled thing became — and what it says is that there is no way back.
And the inference recorded in al-Fatḥ is here borne out by the text's own word: "an unpicked thread does not return to what it was before." al-Naḥl says it with the word ankāth.
Spinning is work whose results accumulate slowly. It is not finished in a day; it advances little by little, thread by thread. And the force of the parable comes from the destruction being done by the same hand: the one who unravels the yarn is the one who spun it.
The verse, then, does not tell of a harm coming from outside. It tells of a hand turning back upon its own labour.
And the bearing of this on the spoken word is drawn directly: an oath too rests upon a trust built up over time. What is lost when it is broken is not that one oath — it is the whole accumulation behind it. And ankāth is indeed not a single thread but pieces.
I do not rest this reading on a transmitted report; my ground is the work the parable chooses and the plural of the word ankāth.
A note required by the method (Method)
A woman is named in the parable, and in the classical sources it is transmitted that this comparison points to a particular woman who lived in Mecca. This commentary attaches no personal name to that report, because I have no verified source for it. And, more important: what the verse builds is not the description of a person but the description of a work.
The wording of the sentence shows it: ka'llatī — not "like that woman" but "like the one who does this work". The definite relative pronoun points not to the person but to the act. And the line kept at al-Zukhruf, 43/18, is kept here too: the verse speaks not about a sex but about a behaviour.
دَخَل — root د-خ-ل: to enter. The lexicographers describe the word thus: a corrupting element pushed inside a thing and not belonging to it; hidden corruption, deceit. Dakhal is used also of a person who joins a community afterwards and spoils it.
And the picture in the word works together with the parable: the yarn looks sound from outside, but within it there is a faulty fibre. An oath too looks sound from outside, but a dakhal has been mixed into it.
I record this as an observation about the language, and I rest it on the presence of the two words (ghazl and dakhal) in the same verse.
أَرْبَىٰ — root ر-ب-و: to increase, to swell, to grow more. The root was treated in detail at al-Rūm, 30/39, and at al-Baqara, 2/275-276 (ribā); I rely on those treatments.
And the usage here is worth recording: an takūna ummatun hiya arbā min umma — one community's being more numerous, stronger than another. The reason given for breaking one's word, then, is superiority in numbers.
I give this as an observation: the verse names the breaking of a covenant not as a debate about principle but as a calculation of power. The reason for changing sides is which side is the more numerous.
إِنَّمَا يَبْلُوكُمُ ٱللَّهُ بِهِۦ وَلَيُبَيِّنَنَّ لَكُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ مَا كُنتُمْ فِيهِ تَخْتَلِفُونَ — and the rest of the verse says two things: that this is a trial, and that the disagreement will be made clear on the Day of Resurrection.
The second clause must be recorded: wa la-yubayyinanna lakum yawma'l-qiyāmati mā kuntum fīhi takhtalifūn. This is a link in the sūra's ب-ي-ن series, and it is almost identical with the sentence in the thirty-ninth verse (li-yubayyina lahumu'lladhī yakhtalifūna fīh). The difference between them is the addressee: there the third person, here the second. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
وَلَوْ شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ لَجَعَلَكُمْ أُمَّةً وَٰحِدَةً وَلَٰكِن يُضِلُّ مَن يَشَآءُ وَيَهْدِى مَن يَشَآءُ وَلَتُسْـَٔلُنَّ عَمَّا كُنتُمْ تَعْمَلُونَ · وَلَا تَتَّخِذُوٓا۟ أَيْمَٰنَكُمْ دَخَلًۢا بَيْنَكُمْ فَتَزِلَّ قَدَمٌۢ بَعْدَ ثُبُوتِهَا وَتَذُوقُوا۟ ٱلسُّوٓءَ بِمَا صَدَدتُّمْ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَلَكُمْ عَذَابٌ عَظِيمٌ
Wa law shāʾa'llāhu la-jaʿalakum ummatan wāḥidatan wa lākin yuḍillu man yashāʾu wa yahdī man yashāʾ, wa la-tusʾalunna ʿammā kuntum taʿmalūn · Wa lā tattakhidhū aymānakum dakhalan baynakum fa-tazilla qadamun baʿda thubūtihā wa tadhūqu'l-sūʾa bimā ṣadadtum ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa lakum ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm
"Had God willed He would have made you one single community; but He lets go astray whom He wills and guides whom He wills. You will surely be questioned about what you were doing. · Do not make your oaths a means of deceit among yourselves, or a foot will slip after it had stood firm, and you will taste evil for having turned others from the way of God; and there will be a great punishment for you besides."
It must be recorded: the structure of the parable in the ninety-second verse is built here a second time, in another picture.
| Verse 92 | Verse 94 | |
|---|---|---|
| Before | Ghazlahā min baʿdi quwwatin — yarn made strong | Qadamun baʿda thubūtihā — a foot that had stood firm |
| After | Naqaḍat … ankāthā — unravelled shreds | Fa-tazilla — it slips |
| The shared structure | Firmness → undoing | The same |
Both parables are built on the same skeleton, and both use the particle baʿda. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
And the difference must be recorded: in the first parable the one who undoes is the person herself (naqaḍat); in the second the foot slips (tazilla) — the verb is intransitive, there is no agent. The first parable tells of the intent, the second of the outcome.
زَلَّ — root ز-ل-ل: to slip, to stumble. Zalla — the foot slipped; zalla — a lapse. And the lexicographers record the root's connection with slippery ground.
ثُبُوت — root ث-ب-ت: to be fixed, to stand in place. And the word is ascribed to the foot as thubūtihā: "after its standing firm".
قَدَمٌۢ — and the noun comes indefinite: "a foot". The lexicographers record that the indefiniteness here is not taḥqīr (belittling) but ibhām (leaving unspecified) — whose foot it is, is not said.
I give this as an observation: the sentence does not say "your foot will slip". It says "a foot will slip". The warning is left without an address.
وَلَا تَشْتَرُوا۟ بِعَهْدِ ٱللَّهِ ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًا إِنَّمَا عِندَ ٱللَّهِ هُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ · مَا عِندَكُمْ يَنفَدُ وَمَا عِندَ ٱللَّهِ بَاقٍ وَلَنَجْزِيَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ صَبَرُوٓا۟ أَجْرَهُم بِأَحْسَنِ مَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ
Wa lā tashtarū bi-ʿahdi'llāhi thamanan qalīlā, innamā ʿinda'llāhi huwa khayrun lakum in kuntum taʿlamūn · Mā ʿindakum yanfadu wa mā ʿinda'llāhi bāq, wa la-najziyanna'lladhīna ṣabarū ajrahum bi-aḥsani mā kānū yaʿmalūn
"Do not sell God's covenant for a small price. What is with God is better for you, if only you knew. · What you have runs out; what is with God endures. And We shall surely give those who were patient their reward according to the best of what they used to do."
| What you have | What is with God | |
|---|---|---|
| Expression | Mā ʿindakum | Mā ʿinda'llāh |
| Predicate | Yanfadu — a verb, imperfect | Bāqin — a noun, an active participle |
And the difference of predicate must be recorded, and it is a point of word order: the first predicate is a verb, the second a noun.
In Arabic a verbal sentence conveys becoming and renewal, a nominal sentence fixity and continuance. The lexicographers record this consistently.
I give this as my own reading, its ground being the form of the two predicates: the verse gives the running out as an action in progress and the enduring as a state. The difference, then, is not in the quantity of the two things — it is that the one is at work and the other at rest.
The root ن-ف-د: to come to the end of a thing, to give out. The root was treated at Luqmān, 31/27 (mā nafidat kalimātu'llāh); I rely on that treatment. And there what does not run out was kalimāt; here what does not run out is what is with God.
بِأَحْسَنِ مَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ — and the measure of the recompense must be recorded: according to the best of what they did.
I give this as an observation: the measure is not the average of what was done but the best of it. And this is from the same root as the word iḥsān in the ninetieth verse (ح-س-ن). Having commanded iḥsān, the sūra gives the recompense too in a word from the same root.
مَنْ عَمِلَ صَٰلِحًا مِّن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ وَهُوَ مُؤْمِنٌ فَلَنُحْيِيَنَّهُۥ حَيَوٰةً طَيِّبَةً وَلَنَجْزِيَنَّهُمْ أَجْرَهُم بِأَحْسَنِ مَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ
Man ʿamila ṣāliḥan min dhakarin aw unthā wa huwa muʾminun fa-la-nuḥyiyannahū ḥayātan ṭayyiba, wa la-najziyannahum ajrahum bi-aḥsani mā kānū yaʿmalūn
"Whoever does righteous work, male or female, and is a believer — We shall surely give him a good life, and We shall surely give them their reward according to the best of what they used to do."
This verse has been named at many places in this commentary and used as the ground of a principle: in al-Wāqiʿa, in al-Nabaʾ and in al-Zukhruf — "throughout the Qurʾān it is stated openly that the recompense is not divided according to sex." I rely on those treatments and complete the ring here, from the verse's own place.
And the wording of the verse must be recorded, because it stands in a place where recording it looks unnecessary:
The sentence begins man ʿamila ṣāliḥan. Man is already inclusive — "whoever". Even so the verse adds: min dhakarin aw unthā.
I record this as an observation about the word order: grammatically the addition is not required. That it has been put in shows it was put in for the sake of the record itself.
And the verse's place within the sūra must be recorded: in verses fifty-seven to fifty-nine a society's stance towards a female child was described. In the ninety-seventh verse it is said outright that the recompense does not depend on sex.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is that the two passages stand in the same sūra: the sūra first diagnoses a stance, then lays down a principle that removes the ground of that stance. The distance between them is thirty-eight verses, but both are within the same sūra.
The root ط-ي-ب occurred in the thirty-second verse as ṭayyibīn and in the seventy-second as ṭayyibāt. Here it is used a third time, of life.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And as was recorded at al-Ṣaff, 61/12, the shared idea of the root is this: what is acceptable, what sits well within.
| View | Where the ḥayātan ṭayyiba is |
|---|---|
| 1 | In this world — contentment, peace, breadth of heart |
| 2 | In the grave, in the interworld |
| 3 | In the hereafter |
But a note must be entered in point of word order, and I give it as an observation: the sentence enumerates two recompenses and separates them with a wāw — fa-la-nuḥyiyannahū ḥayātan ṭayyiba and la-najziyannahum ajrahum. Two distinct verbs, two distinct recompenses. This division suggests that the first recompense lies somewhere other than the second. This is an observation; it is not a preference within the disagreement.
فَإِذَا قَرَأْتَ ٱلْقُرْءَانَ فَٱسْتَعِذْ بِٱللَّهِ مِنَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ ٱلرَّجِيمِ · إِنَّهُۥ لَيْسَ لَهُۥ سُلْطَٰنٌ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَلَىٰ رَبِّهِمْ يَتَوَكَّلُونَ · إِنَّمَا سُلْطَٰنُهُۥ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَوَلَّوْنَهُۥ وَٱلَّذِينَ هُم بِهِۦ مُشْرِكُونَ
Fa-idhā qaraʾta'l-qurʾāna fa'staʿidh bi'llāhi mina'l-shayṭāni'l-rajīm · Innahū laysa lahū sulṭānun ʿala'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn · Innamā sulṭānuhū ʿala'lladhīna yatawallawnahū wa'lladhīna hum bihī mushrikūn
"When you read the Qurʾān, seek refuge with God from the outcast Satan. · He has no power over those who believe and rely upon their Lord. · His power is only over those who take him as a patron and who associate him with God."
عَوْذ — root ع-و-ذ: to take refuge, to get behind something. The root was treated in detail in al-Falaq and al-Nās, by way of those sūras' names; I do not repeat it here.
And the same command occurred at Fuṣṣilat, 41/36 (wa immā yanzaghannaka mina'l-shayṭāni nazghun fa'staʿidh bi'llāh), and it was recorded there: the command came immediately after the hardest counsel of all (to meet evil with good) — it was saying "where the counsel will crack first". I rely on that treatment.
| Fuṣṣilat 41/36 | al-Naḥl 16/98 | |
|---|---|---|
| When | Immā yanzaghannaka … nazghun — when a prompting comes | Idhā qaraʾta'l-qurʾān — when you read |
| The kind of condition | Contingent — if it happens | Tied to an act — at every reading |
I give this as an observation: in Fuṣṣilat the seeking of refuge stands in the face of an event; in al-Naḥl it stands before a work. The second is a preparation made without waiting for the danger.
A note is needed on the tense as well: idhā qaraʾta — perfect. The lexicographers record that it has the sense "when you are about to read", and that idhā conveys the future. This is the widespread explanation. Some exegetes also transmit the reading "after you have read"; this view is a minority one. I transmit the disagreement, impose no preference, and issue no legal ruling.
رَجِيم — root ر-ج-م: to stone, to pelt; and from this, to drive off, to banish. The root was treated at al-Mulk, 67/5 (rujūman li'l-shayāṭīn); I rely on that treatment.
Root: س-ل-ط. The core the lexicographers give: to have mastery over a thing, to hold the power of disposal over it. Sulṭa — power; salīṭ — sharp, penetrating.
And the word is used in the Qurʾān in two senses: power, mastery and proof, argument. In Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) the construction bi-ghayri sulṭānin atāhum was treated in the second sense (disputation without ground). Here the first sense is used.
And the construction of the sentence must be recorded: the verse lays down one condition in saying there is no power, and another in saying there is.
| Over whom | Their attributes |
|---|---|
| No power | Āmanū and ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn — two conditions |
| There is power | Yatawallawnahū and bihī mushrikūn — two conditions |
I give this as an observation about the word order: two attributes are enumerated on each side, and both are joined with a wāw. Protection, then, is named not with faith alone but with a stance added to faith (tawakkul); and the other side not with association alone but with a relationship added to it (tawallī — taking as a patron).
وَإِذَا بَدَّلْنَآ ءَايَةً مَّكَانَ ءَايَةٍ وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِمَا يُنَزِّلُ قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّمَآ أَنتَ مُفْتَرٍۭ بَلْ أَكْثَرُهُمْ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ · قُلْ نَزَّلَهُۥ رُوحُ ٱلْقُدُسِ مِن رَّبِّكَ بِٱلْحَقِّ لِيُثَبِّتَ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَهُدًى وَبُشْرَىٰ لِلْمُسْلِمِينَ
Wa idhā baddalnā āyatan makāna āyatin wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā yunazzilu qālū innamā anta muftar, bal aktharuhum lā yaʿlamūn · Qul nazzalahū rūḥu'l-qudusi min rabbika bi'l-ḥaqqi li-yuthabbita'lladhīna āmanū wa hudan wa bushrā li'l-muslimīn
"When We put one verse in the place of another — and God knows best what He sends down — they say: 'You are only an inventor.' No, most of them do not know. · Say: rūḥ al-qudus brought it down from your Lord in truth, to make firm those who believe, and as guidance and glad tidings for those who submit."
The verse records an objection, and the logic of the objection is this: if a text changes, its source cannot be divine.
| Part | Expression | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā yunazzil | A parenthesis — it comes into the middle of the objection |
| 2 | Qul nazzalahū rūḥu'l-qudusi min rabbika bi'l-ḥaqq | The naming of the source |
The place of the first part must be recorded: it comes into the middle of the sentence, before the objection has been reported. The lexicographers call this iʿtirāḍiyya (a parenthetical clause).
I give this as an observation about the word order: in reporting the objection the verse has already put the answer in place beforehand. The reader reads the objection knowing the answer.
In the second verse bi'l-rūḥ occurred, and the disagreement was tabulated there (revelation / Gabriel / prophethood). In the hundred and second verse the construction becomes definite: rūḥ al-qudus.
| View | Who rūḥ al-qudus is |
|---|---|
| 1 | Gabriel — transmitted as the view of the majority |
| 2 | Revelation itself — the same as the use of the word rūḥ in the second verse |
But an internal note must be entered: in the second verse it was yunazzilu'l-malāʾikata bi'l-rūḥ — the angels and the rūḥ were named separately. In the hundred and second the one who brings it down is rūḥ al-qudus. There is a tension between the two verses, and the exegetes resolve it in two ways. No resolution is imposed in this commentary.
The root ث-ب-ت occurred in the ninety-fourth verse (baʿda thubūtihā — the foot's standing firm). In the hundred and second the same root appears again, this time of the believers: li-yuthabbita — to make firm.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I give this as an observation: in the ninety-fourth verse firmness was being lost; in the hundred and second it is given. The same root, in two opposite directions.
And the closing is the same as that of the eighty-ninth verse: wa hudan wa bushrā li'l-muslimīn. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
وَلَقَدْ نَعْلَمُ أَنَّهُمْ يَقُولُونَ إِنَّمَا يُعَلِّمُهُۥ بَشَرٌ لِّسَانُ ٱلَّذِى يُلْحِدُونَ إِلَيْهِ أَعْجَمِىٌّ وَهَٰذَا لِسَانٌ عَرَبِىٌّ مُّبِينٌ
Wa laqad naʿlamu annahum yaqūlūna innamā yuʿallimuhū bashar, lisānu'lladhī yulḥidūna ilayhi aʿjamiyyun wa hādhā lisānun ʿarabiyyun mubīn
"We know well that they say: 'A human being is teaching him.' The tongue of the one they hint at is foreign; and this is a clear Arabic tongue."
This verse was named at al-Zukhruf, 43/3, and it was recorded there: "At al-Naḥl 16/103 the word occurs as an answer to an objection: there aʿjamī is set as the opposite of ʿarabī." I rely on that treatment.
And the method of the answer must be recorded, and I give this as an observation: the verse refutes the claim not morally but linguistically. It does not say "such a thing cannot be"; it says "the tongue of the one you hint at is another tongue".
يُلْحِدُونَ — root ل-ح-د: to swerve to one side, to bend aside. Laḥd — the niche cut into the side of a grave (the Turkish lahit comes from this); mulḥid — one who swerves from the straight. The root was treated at Fuṣṣilat, 41/40 (yulḥidūna fī āyātinā); I rely on that treatment.
And the use of the verb here is worth recording: yulḥidūna ilayhi — "they lean towards him", that is, they hint at him. The root's picture of "swerving to the side" produces the sense of "pointing indirectly".
أَعْجَمِىّ — root ع-ج-م: not to be clear in speech, to be unintelligible. Aʿjam — one who cannot state his meaning plainly; the word names not a people but a condition of intelligibility.
I record this as an observation about the language, and per the method (Method) I state it separately: the verse lays down no value-judgement about a language or a people. The contrast does not lie on the axis ʿarabī / aʿjamī but on the axis intelligible / unintelligible — indeed the verse adds the adjective mubīn (plain) to the word ʿarabī. The stress falls not on the name of the tongue but on its clarity.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ لَا يَهْدِيهِمُ ٱللَّهُ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ · إِنَّمَا يَفْتَرِى ٱلْكَذِبَ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْكَٰذِبُونَ
Inna'lladhīna lā yuʾminūna bi-āyāti'llāhi lā yahdīhimu'llāhu wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm · Innamā yaftari'l-kadhiba'lladhīna lā yuʾminūna bi-āyāti'llāh, wa ulāʾika humu'l-kādhibūn
"Those who do not believe in the signs of God — God does not guide them, and for them there is a painful punishment. · Only those who do not believe in the signs of God invent lies; and it is they who are the liars."
| Verse | Expression | About whom |
|---|---|---|
| 101 | Innamā anta muftar | The charge — from the mouths of the addressees |
| 105 | Innamā yaftari'l-kadhiba'lladhīna lā yuʾminūn | The answer — the same particle, the same root |
And the particle innamā is repeated too. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and the two sentences are built to the same pattern.
I record this as an observation about the word order: in rejecting the charge the verse does not change the word. It gives the same word back, with the same particle of restriction. The same movement was recorded in al-Aḥqāf for the word ifk (what was said in verse 11 was given back in verse 28); I rely on that treatment.
مَن كَفَرَ بِٱللَّهِ مِنۢ بَعْدِ إِيمَٰنِهِۦٓ إِلَّا مَنْ أُكْرِهَ وَقَلْبُهُۥ مُطْمَئِنٌّۢ بِٱلْإِيمَٰنِ وَلَٰكِن مَّن شَرَحَ بِٱلْكُفْرِ صَدْرًا فَعَلَيْهِمْ غَضَبٌ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ عَظِيمٌ
Man kafara bi'llāhi min baʿdi īmānihī illā man ukriha wa qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun bi'l-īmāni wa lākin man sharaḥa bi'l-kufri ṣadran fa-ʿalayhim ghaḍabun mina'llāhi wa lahum ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm
"Whoever denies God after having believed — except one who is compelled while his heart is at rest in faith — and whoever opens his breast to denial: upon them is anger from God, and for them there is a great punishment."
In treating this verse a limit must be set at the outset, per the method (Method): no legal ruling is issued here. In the classical sources this verse has been counted one of the chief grounds of the law of ikrāh (compulsion), and a broad juristic literature has formed around it. This commentary does not enter that literature.
What is treated is what the verse does in its wording. And in point of word order the most striking thing in the verse is where the exception is placed.
| Order | Part | Kind |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Man kafara bi'llāhi min baʿdi īmānihī | The condition — the case a ruling is to be laid upon |
| 2 | Illā man ukriha wa qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun bi'l-īmān | THE EXCEPTION |
| 3 | Wa lākin man sharaḥa bi'l-kufri ṣadrā | The one the ruling truly falls on |
| 4 | Fa-ʿalayhim ghaḍabun mina'llāh… | The apodosis |
The sentence does not say "upon those who do such and such is anger; except those who are compelled". It says: "whoever denies — except one who is compelled — and whoever opens his breast…"
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that order: the exception comes in before the sentence of judgement is complete. The dispensation, that is, is given not as a consequence of the ruling but within the ruling's own definition. Before saying whom the anger is directed at, the verse says whom it is not directed at.
| Qualification | Expression | Where |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ukriha — he was compelled | Outside — a passive verb; the compeller is not named |
| 2 | Qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun bi'l-īmān | Inside — the state of the heart |
That the verb is passive must be recorded: ukriha. The one who compels is not named. And this is a pattern recorded at many places in this commentary — at Fāṭir, 35/8, for zuyyina, and at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), 40/37, for the same verb.
كَرِهَ / أُكْرِهَ — root ك-ر-ه: to dislike, not to want. In Form IV (akraha): to make someone do what he does not want. At the centre of the root, then, lies the idea of being outside one's own wanting.
The root ط-م-ن was treated at al-Baqara, 2/260, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there:
"لِّيَطْمَئِنَّ قَلْبِى — root ط-م-ن: to grow calm, to settle, to come to rest in its place. The lexicographers record the picture of 'a thing settling into a hollow and being held fast'." "Faith and iṭmiʾnān are not the same thing. The one is acceptance, the other a settling within."
It must be recorded: the verse does not say "if his heart believes". It says qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun bi'l-īmān.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the distinction drawn in al-Baqara: what is laid down as the condition of the dispensation is not the presence of faith but faith's having settled into place. That is: the presence of something within which the words spoken outside cannot shift.
And the picture in the root gives this openly: iṭmiʾnān is a thing's settling into a hollow. To move it, it has to be lifted out. A pressure coming from outside does not shift what has settled.
| Place | Whose iṭmiʾnān | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/260 | Abraham's — li-yaṭmaʾinna qalbī | Asked for — a request to be made firm by seeing |
| al-Naḥl 16/106 | The compelled man's — qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun | Found present — the condition of the dispensation |
The same root: in the one a request, in the other a state. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
شَرَحَ — root ش-ر-ح: to open, to split open and widen. Sharḥ — to open out a text; inshirāḥ — the widening of the breast. The root was treated in detail in al-Inshirāḥ, by way of that sūra's name; I do not repeat it here.
| The one compelled | The one who opens his breast | |
|---|---|---|
| The heart | Muṭmaʾinn — settled, fixed | Sharaḥa ṣadrā — opened, widened |
| The direction | Resistance from inside outwards | Acceptance from inside outwards |
| The will | Ukriha — passive, outside his will | Sharaḥa — active, his own act |
All three lines can be verified from the text, and the wording shows it: the verb of the first state is passive, that of the second active.
I record this as my own reading, its ground being the voices of the verbs: in dividing the two cases the verse looks at who did it. The measure is not the word spoken — it is where the word came from.
In the classical sources it is transmitted that this verse was revealed concerning a man who was tortured in the Meccan period, and an account is given.
This commentary attaches no personal name to that report, because I have no verified chain of transmission. The account itself is present in the sources; to whom it belongs, and its details, are another matter.
And I record this: whether the account of the occasion is known or not, the wording of the verse says the same thing. The scope of the exception is fixed not by the details of an event but by two words: ukriha and muṭmaʾinn.
ذَٰلِكَ بِأَنَّهُمُ ٱسْتَحَبُّوا۟ ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا عَلَى ٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ وَأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَهْدِى ٱلْقَوْمَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ · أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ طَبَعَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ قُلُوبِهِمْ وَسَمْعِهِمْ وَأَبْصَٰرِهِمْ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْغَٰفِلُونَ · لَا جَرَمَ أَنَّهُمْ فِى ٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ هُمُ ٱلْخَٰسِرُونَ
Dhālika bi-annahumu'staḥabbu'l-ḥayāta'l-dunyā ʿala'l-ākhirati wa anna'llāha lā yahdi'l-qawma'l-kāfirīn · Ulāʾika'lladhīna ṭabaʿa'llāhu ʿalā qulūbihim wa samʿihim wa abṣārihim wa ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn · Lā jarama annahum fi'l-ākhirati humu'l-khāsirūn
"That is because they preferred the life of this world to the hereafter, and because God does not guide a denying people. · Those are they whose hearts, hearing and eyes God has sealed; and it is they who are the heedless. · Beyond doubt, in the hereafter it is they who are the losers."
In Form X (istaḥabba): to prefer, to choose one thing over another. The primary sense of the root is love; here Form X conveys the act of choosing.
And the ground must be recorded: the verse names the cause of the ruling in the hundred and sixth verse not as a question of belief but as a preference. The measure, then, is not what is believed — it is what is put first.
The sealing of the heart, the hearing and the eyes is the opposite of the triad given in the seventy-eighth verse. And the order has been reversed:
| Verse | Order | Verb |
|---|---|---|
| 78 | al-Samʿ → al-abṣār → al-afʾida | Jaʿala lakum — given |
| 108 | Qulūbihim → samʿihim → abṣārihim | Ṭabaʿa'llāhu — sealed |
The difference of order must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: in the giving they were enumerated from outside inward — hearing, sight, apprehension. In the sealing they are enumerated from inside outward — the heart first.
The closing thus begins not at the organs of reception but at the centre of appraisal. This agrees with the sūra's own diagnosis: in the eighty-third verse the trouble was named denial after recognition — that is, not in the senses but at the stage of acceptance.
The root ط-ب-ع: to stamp a seal, to set a mark. The root was treated at al-Rūm, 30/58-59 (ka-dhālika yaṭbaʿu'llāhu ʿalā qulūbi'lladhīna lā yaʿlamūn); I rely on that treatment. And at al-Jāthiya, 45/23, the same triad occurred with khatm and ghishāwa.
And the construction lā jarama occurs for the second and last time in the sūra (23 and 109). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
ثُمَّ إِنَّ رَبَّكَ لِلَّذِينَ هَاجَرُوا۟ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا فُتِنُوا۟ ثُمَّ جَٰهَدُوا۟ وَصَبَرُوٓا۟ إِنَّ رَبَّكَ مِنۢ بَعْدِهَا لَغَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ · يَوْمَ تَأْتِى كُلُّ نَفْسٍ تُجَٰدِلُ عَن نَّفْسِهَا وَتُوَفَّىٰ كُلُّ نَفْسٍ مَّا عَمِلَتْ وَهُمْ لَا يُظْلَمُونَ
Thumma inna rabbaka lilladhīna hājarū min baʿdi mā futinū thumma jāhadū wa ṣabarū inna rabbaka min baʿdihā la-ghafūrun raḥīm · Yawma taʾtī kullu nafsin tujādilu ʿan nafsihā wa tuwaffā kullu nafsin mā ʿamilat wa hum lā yuẓlamūn
"Then your Lord — for those who emigrated after they had been put to the test, and then strove and were patient: your Lord after all that is surely most forgiving, most merciful. · On the day when every soul comes pleading for itself, and every soul is paid in full for what it did, and they are not wronged."
| Order | Verb | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Hājarū min baʿdi mā futinū | Emigration — after the testing |
| 2 | Thumma jāhadū | Striving |
| 3 | Wa ṣabarū | Patience |
| Verses 41-42 | Verse 110 | |
|---|---|---|
| The cause of the emigration | Min baʿdi mā ẓulimū — after they had been wronged | Min baʿdi mā futinū — after they had been put to the test |
| The verb added | Ṣabarū wa ʿalā rabbihim yatawakkalūn | Jāhadū wa ṣabarū |
| The closing | Wa la-ajru'l-ākhirati akbar | La-ghafūrun raḥīm |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and I record this as my own reading, its ground being the difference of the closings: the forty-first verse closes with a reward, the hundred and tenth with forgiveness.
And the reason for this lies in the context: the hundred and tenth verse comes directly after the passage on compulsion in the hundred and sixth. The choice of the word "forgiving" is thus connected with the four verses before it. This is an observation, and it rests on the two passages standing back to back.
In the fourth verse man was named khaṣīmun mubīn (an open disputant). In the hundred and eleventh the same verb is used for the last scene of disputation: tujādilu ʿan nafsihā — "it pleads for itself."
| Verse | Word | Root | What it disputes for |
|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | Khaṣīmun mubīn | خ-ص-م | Not specified — as an attribute |
| 111 | Tujādilu ʿan nafsihā | ج-د-ل | For itself |
| 125 | Wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | ج-د-ل | With another, in the best manner |
All three occurrences can be verified from the text, and they stand at three different places in the sūra.
I record this as my own reading, my ground being this threefold set: the sūra first identifies disputation as an attribute (4), then shows that attribute in its most helpless state (111) — a soul pleads for itself and the plea avails nothing — and finally gives that same tendency a direction (125).
And the line recorded at al-Kahf, 18/54 (akthara shayʾin jadalā) is completed here: it was said there, "the tendency is identified, then a limit is set". In al-Naḥl the tendency is identified, its outcome is shown, and a method is given.
وَضَرَبَ ٱللَّهُ مَثَلًا قَرْيَةً كَانَتْ ءَامِنَةً مُّطْمَئِنَّةً يَأْتِيهَا رِزْقُهَا رَغَدًا مِّن كُلِّ مَكَانٍ فَكَفَرَتْ بِأَنْعُمِ ٱللَّهِ فَأَذَٰقَهَا ٱللَّهُ لِبَاسَ ٱلْجُوعِ وَٱلْخَوْفِ بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يَصْنَعُونَ · وَلَقَدْ جَآءَهُمْ رَسُولٌ مِّنْهُمْ فَكَذَّبُوهُ فَأَخَذَهُمُ ٱلْعَذَابُ وَهُمْ ظَٰلِمُونَ
Wa ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan qaryatan kānat āminatan muṭmaʾinnatan yaʾtīhā rizquhā raghadan min kulli makānin fa-kafarat bi-anʿumi'llāhi fa-adhāqaha'llāhu libāsa'l-jūʿi wa'l-khawfi bimā kānū yaṣnaʿūn · Wa laqad jāʾahum rasūlun minhum fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-akhadhahumu'l-ʿadhābu wa hum ẓālimūn
"God has coined the likeness of a town: it was safe and at ease, its provision coming to it in plenty from every side. Then it was ungrateful for God's favours, and God made it taste the garment of hunger and fear for what they had wrought. · A messenger from among themselves had come to them, and they cried him a liar; so the punishment seized them while they were doing wrong."
Both attributes were treated in this commentary, in two separate places. I rely on those treatments:
At al-Qaṣaṣ, 28/57 (a-wa-lam numakkin lahum ḥaraman āminan yujbā ilayhi thamarātu kulli shayʾ) and at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/67 (a-wa-lam yaraw annā jaʿalnā ḥaraman āminan wa yutakhaṭṭafu'l-nāsu min ḥawlihim) the same fact was treated and the two verses compared:
| Place | Expression | Who is snatched away / what is said |
|---|---|---|
| al-ʿAnkabūt 29/67 | Wa yutakhaṭṭafu'l-nāsu min ḥawlihim | Those around them — they themselves are safe |
| al-Qaṣaṣ 28/57 | Nutakhaṭṭaf min arḍinā | Themselves — what they feared |
| al-Naḥl 16/112 | Kānat āminatan muṭmaʾinna | The past tense — the safety has been lost |
And what was recorded in the al-Qaṣaṣ section can be carried over here: the objection was framed not upon belief but upon anxiety about safety, and the answer was given on the same plane — who built the place where you are already safe?
al-Naḥl takes a step further, and I record this as my own reading, my ground being the tense of the verb: al-Qaṣaṣ and al-ʿAnkabūt name the safety as a state still holding. al-Naḥl says kānat — a perfect. The third verse thus shows that the condition the first two describe can be lost.
And the verse gives it as a likeness — the town is not named. This must be recorded: the sentence begins with ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan. What is told is set down not as a particular event of history but as an example. And the exegetes differ over which town it is; no name is given in this commentary.
مُّطْمَئِنَّة — and the root ط-م-ن occurs for the second time in the sūra. In the hundred and sixth verse it was qalbuhū muṭmaʾinnun bi'l-īmān.
| Verse | Whose iṭmiʾnān | Its outcome |
|---|---|---|
| 106 | The heart's — by faith | It held — the condition of the dispensation |
| 112 | The town's — by provision | It did not hold — ingratitude came |
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and I give this as my own reading: the same word, once inside and once outside. The iṭmiʾnān within does not shift even under pressure; the iṭmiʾnān without is lost in the midst of ease. Six verses stand between the two.
The sentence is this: fa-adhāqaha'llāhu libāsa'l-jūʿi wa'l-khawf — "God made it taste the garment of hunger and fear."
| Element | Root | To which sense it belongs |
|---|---|---|
| Adhāqa — made taste | ذ-و-ق | Taste — the mouth |
| Libās — garment | ل-ب-س | Touch — the skin |
| al-Jūʿ — hunger | ج-و-ع | Within — the stomach |
| al-Khawf — fear | خ-و-ف | Within — the mind |
Four elements, four different domains. And the lexicographers call constructions of this kind istiʿāra (borrowing).
Now I open the construction of the comparison step by step, and I give it as my own reading, my ground being this mismatch of the words:
Two — the verse makes them something worn. Libās — a garment. And a garment has two properties: it wraps the body, and it is seen from outside.
Three — the wrapping property: a garment is not on one part of the body but on all of it. Hunger and fear thus cease to be a condition of a person and become something that covers him entirely.
Four — the property of visibility: a garment is what a person shows to the outside. Two states that would be expected to stay within thus become the person's appearance. The identity of the town is now its hunger and its fear.
Five — and the verb turns this round once more: adhāqa — "made taste". The thing worn is tasted. It does not merely wrap from outside; it enters within as well.
The comparison as a whole gives this picture: hunger and fear are first a condition within (the stomach and the mind), then a dress without (libās), then a taste within again (adhāqa). The words draw a circle.
And this reading is an observation that can be drawn from the text; the mismatch of the sensory domains of the words is an observable fact.
| Verse | Expression | The garment of what |
|---|---|---|
| 14 | Ḥilyatan talbasūnahā | Ornament — brought out of the sea |
| 81 | Sarābīla taqīkumu'l-ḥarr | Garments — protection (a different word, but the same domain) |
| 112 | Libāsa'l-jūʿi wa'l-khawf | Hunger and fear |
This is a weave verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading: the sūra enumerated clothing twice as a favour (14, 81). In the hundred and twelfth verse the same domain becomes the name of the loss of favour. An item from the list of the enumeration is turned over and made the name of the punishment.
The lexicographers count anʿum as a plural of niʿma, and some explain the difference between it and the plural niʿam by the distinction between the plural of paucity and the plural of multitude. I transmit this distinction as a tendency the lexicographers record; I do not impose a preference.
And what matters is this: throughout the sūra niʿma was used in the singular (18, 53, 71, 72, 83) and occurred as niʿmatahū in the eighty-first verse. In the hundred and twelfth the plural comes for the first and only time.
I give this as an observation, and it is a countable fact: in naming favour as a single whole the sūra never uses a plural. It uses the plural only of favours that are denied, and only in one place.
The root ص-ن-ع: to do a thing with skill, in an ordered way. Ṣunʿ — a piece of craftsmanship; ṣināʿa — a craft. The root occurred at Fāṭir, 35/8 (inna'llāha ʿalīmun bimā yaṣnaʿūn); I rely on that treatment.
And the choice of the word is worth recording: the verse does not say bimā kānū yaʿmalūn (what they did). It says yaṣnaʿūn — what they made with skill, by repetition.
I give this as an observation about the language: the word names ingratitude not as a stumble but as a habit, a craft.
فَكُلُوا۟ مِمَّا رَزَقَكُمُ ٱللَّهُ حَلَٰلًا طَيِّبًا وَٱشْكُرُوا۟ نِعْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ إِيَّاهُ تَعْبُدُونَ · إِنَّمَا حَرَّمَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْمَيْتَةَ وَٱلدَّمَ وَلَحْمَ ٱلْخِنزِيرِ وَمَآ أُهِلَّ لِغَيْرِ ٱللَّهِ بِهِۦ فَمَنِ ٱضْطُرَّ غَيْرَ بَاغٍ وَلَا عَادٍ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
Fa-kulū mimmā razaqakumu'llāhu ḥalālan ṭayyibā, wa'shkurū niʿmata'llāhi in kuntum iyyāhu taʿbudūn · Innamā ḥarrama ʿalaykumu'l-maytata wa'l-dama wa laḥma'l-khinzīri wa mā uhilla li-ghayri'llāhi bih, fa-mani'ḍṭurra ghayra bāghin wa lā ʿādin fa-inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm
"Eat of what God has provided you, lawful and wholesome; and give thanks for God's favour, if it is Him you serve. · He has forbidden you only carrion, blood, the flesh of swine, and what has been consecrated to other than God. But whoever is driven by necessity — not desiring it and not going beyond the bound — God is most forgiving, most merciful."
It must be recorded: these two verses come directly after the parable of the secure town and are connected with it.
In the parable the town had been ungrateful bi-anʿumi'llāh. The hundred and fourteenth verse answers with the same word: wa'shkurū niʿmata'llāh.
This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being that the two passages stand back to back: the sūra sets a passage on the lawful and the forbidden after an account of ingratitude. The rulings, that is, come as the outcome of an accounting.
This list of four items occurs in four places in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/173, al-Māʾida 5/3, al-Anʿām 6/145, and here.
And what must be recorded is that the list is given with a particle of restriction: innamā — "only, no more than".
I give this as an observation about the word order: the sentence does not build a list of prohibitions; it draws a boundary. And this is the subject of the next section (116): declaring things forbidden on one's own authority.
And the dispensation has the same structure as the dispensation in the hundred and sixth verse, and this must be recorded:
| Verse 106 | Verse 115 | |
|---|---|---|
| The dispensation | Illā man ukriha | Fa-mani'ḍṭurra |
| The voice of the verb | Passive — he was compelled | Passive — he was driven to necessity |
| The qualification | Wa qalbuhū muṭmaʾinn | Ghayra bāghin wa lā ʿādin |
| The closing | Wa lākin man sharaḥa bi'l-kufri ṣadrā | Fa-inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm |
Both dispensations rest on the same skeleton: a passive verb plus an inward qualification. This is an overlap verifiable within the sūra.
اضْطُرَّ — root ض-ر-ر: harm. In Form VIII, passive: "he was forced into a strait, he was left with no choice." And that the verb is passive shows that the necessity is not the person's own choosing — just as with ukriha.
غَيْرَ بَاغٍ وَلَا عَادٍ — two qualifications. The root ب-غ-ي was enumerated in the ninetieth verse among the things forbidden (wa'l-baghy). Here it comes back as the limit of the dispensation. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
And the lexicographers dwell on the difference between the two words, and two explanations are transmitted:
| Explanation | Bāgh | ʿĀd |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | One who seeks it out willingly — when he has no need | One who exceeds the measure — eating more than he needs |
| 2 | One bent on wrongdoing | One who crosses the bound |
وَلَا تَقُولُوا۟ لِمَا تَصِفُ أَلْسِنَتُكُمُ ٱلْكَذِبَ هَٰذَا حَلَٰلٌ وَهَٰذَا حَرَامٌ لِّتَفْتَرُوا۟ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْكَذِبَ إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَفْتَرُونَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْكَذِبَ لَا يُفْلِحُونَ · مَتَٰعٌ قَلِيلٌ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ
Wa lā taqūlū li-mā taṣifu alsinatukumu'l-kadhiba hādhā ḥalālun wa hādhā ḥarāmun li-taftarū ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhib, inna'lladhīna yaftarūna ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhiba lā yufliḥūn · Matāʿun qalīlun wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm
"And do not say, of what your tongues falsely describe, 'this is lawful and this is forbidden', so as to invent lies against God. Those who invent lies against God do not prosper. · A brief enjoyment; and for them there is a painful punishment."
The construction must be recorded, and the same one occurred in the sixty-second verse: wa taṣifu alsinatuhumu'l-kadhib. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and the person changes: there "their tongues", here "your tongues".
And the agent must be recorded: the subject of the verb is alsinatukum — the tongues, not the persons.
I record this as an observation about the word order: the verse does not say "do not lie". It says "your tongues describe a lie". The act is thus detached from the person and ascribed to the organ — as though the tongue produced a ruling of its own.
The root و-ص-ف: to describe a thing by qualifying it. And the work of the word here: the ruling rests not upon a piece of knowledge but upon a description.
A note required by the method (Method)
This verse lays down a principle of method, and it bears directly on the limit this commentary sets itself.
What is forbidden is the pronouncing of a ruling of lawful and forbidden without ground. And the verse says what that amounts to: li-taftarū ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhib — to invent a lie against God.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that clause: the verse names a ruling laid down on one's own authority not as an error but as an attribution. The matter, then, is not the correctness of the ruling; it is to whom it is ascribed.
And this line was treated at al-Baqara, 2/169 (wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn); I rely on that treatment.
One of the reasons no legal ruling is issued in this commentary is the clause written in the method. This verse is one of the textual grounds of that clause.
وَعَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ هَادُوا۟ حَرَّمْنَا مَا قَصَصْنَا عَلَيْكَ مِن قَبْلُ وَمَا ظَلَمْنَٰهُمْ وَلَٰكِن كَانُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ يَظْلِمُونَ
Wa ʿala'lladhīna hādū ḥarramnā mā qaṣaṣnā ʿalayka min qabl, wa mā ẓalamnāhum wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn
"And to those who are Jews We forbade what We recounted to you before. We did not wrong them; it was themselves they were wronging."
It must be recorded: the verse comes after the prohibition of the preceding verse (declaring things lawful or forbidden on one's own authority).
And it gives an example: prohibitions laid down for one community in particular. The verse thus shows by a historical example that the source of a ruling is God.
And the end of the sentence must be recorded: wa mā ẓalamnāhum wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn. This sentence occurred word for word in the thirty-third verse. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
| Verse | Sentence | About whom |
|---|---|---|
| 33 | Wa mā ẓalamahumu'llāhu wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn | Peoples of the past |
| 118 | Wa mā ẓalamnāhum wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn | A community — those on whom a particular prohibition was laid |
The difference is one word: in the thirty-third verse Allāh is named openly; in the hundred and eighteenth the first person plural is used.
A note required by the method (Method)
The evidence within the text is this: the subject of the verse is a list of prohibitions, not an assessment of an identity. And the second half of the sentence ties the ruling to an act: kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn.
The clause of the method holds here exactly: "No wholesale ruling is laid down about an ethnic or religious group; what the verse describes are attributes, and whoever bears that attribute is included in it." And at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/46-47, it was treated in detail how this care is kept; I rely on that treatment.
ثُمَّ إِنَّ رَبَّكَ لِلَّذِينَ عَمِلُوا۟ ٱلسُّوٓءَ بِجَهَٰلَةٍ ثُمَّ تَابُوا۟ مِنۢ بَعْدِ ذَٰلِكَ وَأَصْلَحُوٓا۟ إِنَّ رَبَّكَ مِنۢ بَعْدِهَا لَغَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
Thumma inna rabbaka lilladhīna ʿamilu'l-sūʾa bi-jahālatin thumma tābū min baʿdi dhālika wa aṣlaḥū inna rabbaka min baʿdihā la-ghafūrun raḥīm
"Then your Lord — for those who did evil in ignorance, then repented after that and set things right: your Lord after all that is surely most forgiving, most merciful."
The sentence stands on the same skeleton as the hundred and tenth verse, and this is a repetition verifiable within the sūra:
| Verse 110 | Verse 119 | |
|---|---|---|
| The opening | Thumma inna rabbaka lilladhīna… | The same |
| Who | Hājarū … jāhadū wa ṣabarū | ʿAmilu'l-sūʾa bi-jahālatin … tābū wa aṣlaḥū |
| The closing | Inna rabbaka min baʿdihā la-ghafūrun raḥīm | The same |
The same pattern, for two different groups. And I record this as my own reading, my ground being this symmetry: the first group are those who were wronged and emigrated, the second those who did evil and repented. The sūra meets both with the same sentence.
"Pardon on its own may be a withdrawal — a man does not take his right, he cuts the relation, he goes away. Technically that is pardon, but it does not repair what was broken. The condition of iṣlāḥ ties pardon to a repair."
The same structure works here for repentance, and I give it as an observation: repentance too may be a withdrawal on its own. The condition of iṣlāḥ ties it to a repair.
And the root ص-ل-ح was treated at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9-10: to make what has been spoiled fit for use again. I rely on that treatment.
| Explanation | What jahāla is |
|---|---|
| 1 | Ignorance — doing a thing without knowing the ruling |
| 2 | Thoughtlessness, anger, excess — knowingly, but without reflection |
The second explanation rests on the root's use in Arabic: jahl is the opposite of forbearance (ḥilm) as much as it is the opposite of knowledge. Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.
إِنَّ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ كَانَ أُمَّةً قَانِتًا لِّلَّهِ حَنِيفًا وَلَمْ يَكُ مِنَ ٱلْمُشْرِكِينَ · شَاكِرًا لِّأَنْعُمِهِ ٱجْتَبَىٰهُ وَهَدَىٰهُ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ · وَءَاتَيْنَٰهُ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا حَسَنَةً وَإِنَّهُۥ فِى ٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ لَمِنَ ٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ · ثُمَّ أَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَيْكَ أَنِ ٱتَّبِعْ مِلَّةَ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ حَنِيفًا وَمَا كَانَ مِنَ ٱلْمُشْرِكِينَ
Inna Ibrāhīma kāna ummatan qānitan li'llāhi ḥanīfā, wa lam yaku mina'l-mushrikīn · Shākiran li-anʿumih, ijtabāhu wa hadāhu ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm · Wa ātaynāhu fi'l-dunyā ḥasana, wa innahū fi'l-ākhirati la-mina'l-ṣāliḥīn · Thumma awḥaynā ilayka ani'ttabiʿ millata Ibrāhīma ḥanīfā, wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīn
"Abraham was a community, devoutly obedient to God, ḥanīf; and he was not one of those who associate. · He was thankful for His favours. God chose him and guided him to a straight path. · We gave him good in this world; and in the hereafter he is among the righteous. · Then We revealed to you: 'Follow the way of Abraham, as a ḥanīf.' He was not one of those who associate."
The word is umma, and it is used of a single man. This is a place the lexicographers dwell on, and the explanations must be set out in a table:
| Explanation | What umma is here |
|---|---|
| 1 | Worth a whole community by himself — an intensification |
| 2 | A leader, an imām — one who is followed |
| 3 | A man in whom good is gathered — umma in the sense of "what is gathered" |
And the sense of the root must be recorded: أ-م-م — to head towards, to intend; amma — he headed for; imām — one who goes in front; umm — the origin, the source. In the root, then, there is both the idea of direction and the idea of source.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 112 | Fa-kafarat bi-anʿumi'llāh | The town — it was ungrateful |
| 121 | Shākiran li-anʿumih | Abraham — he gave thanks |
The same plural word, with two opposite verbs. And nine verses stand between them. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and a countable fact — the word occurs in these two places only.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is these two occurrences: the sūra ties its enumeration of favours to a town as its negative case and to a man as its positive one. The hundred and twenty-first verse stands like an answer given to the whole enumeration of the sūra: what the one gives thanks for and the other denies is the same thing.
And the purpose of the sūra's enumeration in the eighty-first verse was laʿallakum tuslimūn. And Abraham's attribute is qānitan li'llāhi ḥanīfā — bowed in obedience. The two expressions look towards the same place.
The root was treated in detail at al-Rūm, 30/30; I rely on that treatment. The word's sense of "inclining in one direction" and its relation to fiṭra were analysed there. I do not repeat it here.
What belongs here: the word occurs twice, in two verses (120 and 123), and in both together with the same sentence: wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīn.
This repetition must be recorded, and I give it as an observation about the word order: ḥanīf is a positive description, wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīn a negative one. The verse uses the two together, twice. The description is thus completed by saying both what he was and what he was not.
قَانِت — root ق-ن-ت: unbroken obedience, uninterrupted submission. The root occurred at al-Rūm, 30/26 (kullun lahū qānitūn).
ٱجْتَبَىٰهُ — root ج-ب-ي: to gather, to bring together, to pick out and take. Jibāya — the collecting of a tax. In Form VIII: to choose — that is, to single out and gather from among many.
And the particle thumma must be recorded. In Arabic thumma conveys sequence and an interval. The verse thus marks with a particle the span of time between Abraham and the one addressed.
And the content of the command must be recorded: ittabiʿ millata Ibrāhīm — "follow the way of Abraham."
The root م-ل-ل: milla, the way held to, the manner followed. The lexicographers record its relation to the sense "dictated, written down at another's word" (imlāʾ) — that is, a way taken from another and followed.
I give this as an observation: the command conveys not the following of a person but the following of a way. And the attributes of that way had already been enumerated over four verses: obedience, being ḥanīf, thankfulness, not associating.
إِنَّمَا جُعِلَ ٱلسَّبْتُ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ ٱخْتَلَفُوا۟ فِيهِ وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَيَحْكُمُ بَيْنَهُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ فِيمَا كَانُوا۟ فِيهِ يَخْتَلِفُونَ
Innamā juʿila'l-sabtu ʿala'lladhīna'khtalafū fīh, wa inna rabbaka la-yaḥkumu baynahum yawma'l-qiyāmati fīmā kānū fīhi yakhtalifūn
"The Sabbath was laid down only upon those who differed about it. And your Lord will judge between them on the Day of Resurrection concerning that over which they differed."
The root خ-ل-ف occurs three times in this one verse: ikhtalafū, yakhtalifūn, and the disagreement to which fīmā kānū fīhi attaches.
And the root had occurred earlier in the sūra: in the thirty-ninth verse (yakhtalifūna fīh), in the ninety-second (mā kuntum fīhi takhtalifūn), in the sixty-fourth (alladhi'khtalafū fīh). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
And the work of this verse must be recorded: the verse ties the cause of a ruling to a disagreement, and leaves the settling of the disagreement to the hereafter. It thus arrives at the same place as the sūra's ب-ي-ن series.
سَبْت — root س-ب-ت: to cut off, to stop, to break off. Subāt occurs in the Qurʾān as a description of sleep (al-Nabaʾ 78/9; al-Furqān 25/47) and was treated at al-Furqān, 25/47. The same root is here the name of the weekly day of stopping.
I record this as an observation about the language: the picture in the root is the same in both — the cutting off of work. The one daily, the other weekly.
The Qurʾān touches on this subject in several places (al-Baqara 2/65, al-Aʿrāf 7/163 and al-Nisāʾ 4/154). No detail is entered into, because al-Naḥl's verse does not enter into it either: innamā juʿila'l-sabtu ʿala'lladhīna'khtalafū fīh — a single sentence.
ٱدْعُ إِلَىٰ سَبِيلِ رَبِّكَ بِٱلْحِكْمَةِ وَٱلْمَوْعِظَةِ ٱلْحَسَنَةِ وَجَٰدِلْهُم بِٱلَّتِى هِىَ أَحْسَنُ إِنَّ رَبَّكَ هُوَ أَعْلَمُ بِمَن ضَلَّ عَن سَبِيلِهِۦ وَهُوَ أَعْلَمُ بِٱلْمُهْتَدِينَ
Udʿu ilā sabīli rabbika bi'l-ḥikmati wa'l-mawʿiẓati'l-ḥasanati wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan, inna rabbaka huwa aʿlamu bi-man ḍalla ʿan sabīlihī wa huwa aʿlamu bi'l-muhtadīn
"Call to the way of your Lord with wisdom and with fair admonition; and dispute with them in the way that is best. Your Lord knows best who has strayed from His way, and He knows best those who are guided."
| Order | Instrument | Form | Is there an adjective |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Bi'l-ḥikma | Bāʾ + noun | None |
| 2 | Wa'l-mawʿiẓati'l-ḥasana | Coordinated with the preceding | Yes — ḥasana |
| 3 | Wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | An imperative verb — a separate clause | Yes — aḥsan, the elative |
One — ḥikma is given no adjective. The other two have one. The lexicographers put this down to aptness being already present in wisdom itself — the root of ḥikma is ح-ك-م: to put a thing in its proper place, to make it fast; ḥakama — to bridle an animal and so control it. The word means "what is in its place"; no adjective is needed.
Three — and the third item is given as a separate clause, with an imperative verb. The first two are joined with a bāʾ, while the third is a command of its own: jādilhum.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is these three differences of structure: the first two are the form of the calling; the third is a separate work that comes into play if the other side resists. Indeed the first two carry no pronoun for the addressee, while the third does: jādilhum.
And the rising of the adjectives fits this: as the work grows harder, the measure rises. What is asked in disputation is more than what is asked in admonition.
This construction was treated at three places in this commentary, and a table of three links was drawn up. At al-Qaṣaṣ, 28/54, the table stood thus, and I rely on it:
| Place | Command | Domain |
|---|---|---|
| Fuṣṣilat 41/34 | Idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | Answering evil |
| al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46 | Lā tujādilū illā bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | Disputation |
| al-Qaṣaṣ 28/54 | Yadraʾūn — د-ر-أ | Evil |
| # | Place | Expression | Domain | The kind of clause |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Fuṣṣilat 41/34 | Idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | Answering evil | A command |
| 2 | al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46 | Lā tujādilū illā bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | Disputing with the People of the Book | A prohibition — with an exception |
| 3 | al-Qaṣaṣ 28/54 | Yadraʾūna bi'l-ḥasanati'l-sayyiʾa | Warding off evil | A statement — in praise |
| 4 | al-Naḥl 16/125 | Wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | The calling in general | A command |
And the difference of the fourth link must be recorded, because it is the contrary form of al-ʿAnkabūt's:
| al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46 | al-Naḥl 16/125 | |
|---|---|---|
| The clause | Wa lā tujādilū … illā bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | Wa jādilhum bi'llatī hiya aḥsan |
| The form | A prohibition + an exception | A command |
| The addressee | Ahla'l-kitāb — definite | Indefinite — hum |
| The exception | Illa'lladhīna ẓalamū minhum | None |
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the grammatical form of the two clauses: al-ʿAnkabūt forbids disputation and opens it again by an exception; al-Naḥl commands it outright.
The outcome is the same — a method is fixed — but the route differs. In al-ʿAnkabūt the default position is "disputing", in al-Naḥl the default position is "dispute in the best way".
And what was recorded in the al-ʿAnkabūt section holds here too, and I repeat it: the command is framed not as a prohibition but as a condition of manner. Disputation is not forbidden; its method is fixed.
And it was tabulated that the whole backbone of Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) is jidāl, and that what is condemned there is disputation without ground (bi-ghayri sulṭānin atāhum). At al-Naḥl 16/4 man's contentiousness was identified as an attribute; at 16/125 that attribute is given a form. This is a ring verifiable within the sūra, and it was treated above at 16/4 and 16/111.
I record this as an observation about the word order: having enumerated three instruments, the sentence says in whose hand the outcome lies. The method belongs to the one addressed; the outcome does not.
This limit was treated at many places in this commentary: Fāṭir 35/8 and 35/19-23, al-Zumar 39/41, al-Rūm 30/52-53, al-Aḥqāf 46/35. And it had already occurred in the thirty-fifth and eighty-second verses of this sūra as balāgh. I do not repeat it here.
وَإِنْ عَاقَبْتُمْ فَعَاقِبُوا۟ بِمِثْلِ مَا عُوقِبْتُم بِهِۦ وَلَئِن صَبَرْتُمْ لَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لِّلصَّٰبِرِينَ · وَٱصْبِرْ وَمَا صَبْرُكَ إِلَّا بِٱللَّهِ وَلَا تَحْزَنْ عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا تَكُ فِى ضَيْقٍ مِّمَّا يَمْكُرُونَ
Wa in ʿāqabtum fa-ʿāqibū bi-mithli mā ʿūqibtum bih, wa la-in ṣabartum la-huwa khayrun li'l-ṣābirīn · Wa'ṣbir wa mā ṣabruka illā bi'llāh, wa lā taḥzan ʿalayhim wa lā taku fī ḍayqin mimmā yamkurūn
"If you punish, punish with the like of what you were punished with. But if you are patient, that is better for the patient. · So be patient. And your patience is only by God. Do not grieve over them, and do not be in distress at what they plot."
These two verses build the balance treated in detail at al-Shūrā, 42/40-43, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there was this:
"The sentence calls the recompense that is a man's right sayyiʾa as well… That the recompense should be called an 'evil' shows that using one's right and virtue are not the same thing. A man takes his right and is not blamed for it — the forty-first verse will say this outright. But what he takes is not named a good thing." "Mithl — equal, matching. And this word is the sentence's most important limit: the recompense must be equal. More than that is wrongdoing." "Immediately after the fortieth verse praises pardon, the forty-first defends the one who does not pardon. This order matters: had pardon been praised and left there, the man who takes his right would have been blamed by implication. The verse closes that door."
| al-Shūrā 42/40-43 | al-Naḥl 16/126-127 | |
|---|---|---|
| The right of recompense | Jazāʾu sayyiʾatin sayyiʾatun mithluhā (40) | Fa-ʿāqibū bi-mithli mā ʿūqibtum bih (126) |
| The word of measure | Mithl | Mithl — the same word |
| The defence of the right | Wa la-mani'ntaṣara baʿda ẓulmihī fa-ulāʾika mā ʿalayhim min sabīl (41) | No separate clause — the conditional clause is itself the dispensation |
| What is held higher | Fa-man ʿafā wa aṣlaḥa fa-ajruhū ʿala'llāh (40) | Wa la-in ṣabartum la-huwa khayr (126) |
| The word for what is higher | ʿAfw — pardon | Ṣabr — endurance |
| The closing | Wa la-man ṣabara wa ghafara inna dhālika la-min ʿazmi'l-umūr (43) | Wa'ṣbir wa mā ṣabruka illā bi'llāh (127) |
One — the word of measure is the same: mithl. Both sūras limit the right of recompense by equivalence. And what was recorded in al-Shūrā holds here too: more than that is wrongdoing.
Two — the name of what is held higher changes. al-Shūrā says ʿafw (pardon); al-Naḥl says ṣabr (endurance).
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the difference between the two words: ʿafw is the relinquishing of a right — an act turned towards the other party. Ṣabr is endurance — a state turned towards oneself. al-Shūrā, then, puts the relation at the centre, al-Naḥl the person.
And in al-Shūrā ʿafw was not counted sufficient on its own; iṣlāḥ was added beside it. In al-Naḥl ṣabr comes alone — but with a qualification: wa mā ṣabruka illā bi'llāh.
Three — and the two sūras meet at the same place. al-Shūrā 42/43 says: wa la-man ṣabara wa ghafara inna dhālika la-min ʿazmi'l-umūr. al-Shūrā too, then, arrives in the end at the word ṣabr.
It was recorded in the al-Shūrā section: the construction ʿazmu'l-umūr occurs in three places in the Qurʾān, and in all three it comes together with ṣabr. al-Naḥl's closing stands like a fourth textual counterpart to that set of three — without using the construction, but arriving at the same place.
The wording of the sentence is this: a command (wa'ṣbir) → immediately after it a limitation (wa mā ṣabruka illā bi'llāh).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that juxtaposition: the verse commands patience and in the same breath says that the patience does not issue from the addressee's own source. In giving the command it also states where the strength to carry it out will come from.
And the same structure was recorded at Fuṣṣilat, 41/35: wa mā yulaqqāhā illa'lladhīna ṣabarū wa mā yulaqqāhā illā dhū ḥaẓẓin ʿaẓīm — the verb was passive: "it is granted". It was recorded there: "this stance is named not as a temperament that comes of itself but as something given." al-Naḥl says the same thing outright: illā bi'llāh.
| Prohibition | Root | What |
|---|---|---|
| Lā taḥzan ʿalayhim | ح-ز-ن | Do not grieve |
| Wa lā taku fī ḍayqin | ض-ي-ق | Do not fall into distress — a narrowing |
The root ح-ز-ن: the concrete sense the lexicographers give is hard, broken, difficult ground (al-ḥazn). Grief thus carries in its root the picture of "ground that is hard to walk on".
The root ض-ي-ق: narrowness, being pressed. And at al-Naml, 27/70, the same two prohibitions occur together (wa lā taḥzan ʿalayhim wa lā takun fī ḍayqin mimmā yamkurūn) — almost word for word the same sentence. This verse was treated in the al-Naml section, and the return of the root م-ك-ر within that sūra was recorded there. I rely on that treatment.
And it was recorded in al-Ḥadīd: the Qurʾān records the grief of the prophets and does not condemn it — and this verse ("do not grieve over them") was named there as evidence. I rely on that treatment and take the note over here: the prohibition shows that the grief exists. What does not exist is not forbidden.
مِّمَّا يَمْكُرُونَ — and the root م-ك-ر occurs for the third and last time in the sūra (26, 45, 127). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.
| Verse | Expression | Who / when |
|---|---|---|
| 26 | Qad makara'lladhīna min qablihim | Peoples of the past — concluded |
| 45 | A-fa-amina'lladhīna makaru'l-sayyiʾāt | Those of the present — a warning |
| 127 | Mimmā yamkurūn | Those of the present — the addressee's situation |
I record this as my own reading: in the sūra the root occurs first as a finished history, then as a threat, and finally as a reason for consolation. The same fact is named from three distances, and in the last the addressee is told "do not be pressed by this" — because at the first occurrence its outcome had already been shown.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مَعَ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوا۟ وَّٱلَّذِينَ هُم مُّحْسِنُونَ
| Attribute | Root | Its other occurrence in the sūra |
|---|---|---|
| Ittaqaw | و-ق-ي | Verse 30 — wa qīla lilladhīna'ttaqaw |
| Muḥsinūn | ح-س-ن | Verse 90 — yaʾmuru bi'l-ʿadli wa'l-iḥsān |
And the link with the ninetieth verse must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: the ninetieth verse commanded three things, and the second was iḥsān. The hundred and twenty-eighth uses the same root as the sūra's last word: muḥsinūn.
The sūra, then, gives back at the end, as an attribute, what it had commanded. The command turns, at the close, into an identity.
Taqwā — root و-ق-ي: to guard oneself, to keep clear. At the centre of the word stands avoidance — what is not to be done. Iḥsān — root ح-س-ن. At the centre of the word stands the surplus — what is to be done.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the direction of the words themselves: the two attributes look in two opposite directions — the one towards drawing back, the other towards going forward. And the sūra's last sentence names them together.
And this is the same structure as in the ninetieth verse: there too three commands (forward) and three prohibitions (back) were given together. The sūra keeps its account of the moral life two-directional to the very end.
مَعَ — and the last word conveys a being-with: maʿa'llāh. At al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/69 (wa inna'llāha la-maʿa'l-muḥsinīn), almost the same sentence occurs. The two sūras close with the same attribute and the same particle. This is an overlap verifiable across the sūras.
The sūra's backbone was tabulated above, in the introduction. Here only what the points of interruption do is gathered:
| Interruption | Verse | Kind | What it does |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 11, 12, 13 | A qualification — li-qawmin yatafakkarūn / yaʿqilūn / yadhdhakkarūn | It ties the list to a capacity |
| 2 | 17 | A question — a-fa-man yakhluqu ka-man lā yakhluq | It turns the list into a comparison |
| 3 | 18 | A ruling — lā tuḥṣūhā | It declares the enumeration impossible |
| 4 | 65, 67, 69, 79 | A qualification — yasmaʿūn / yaʿqilūn / yatafakkarūn / yuʾminūn | The sections of the second enumeration |
| 5 | 71, 72 | A question — a-fa-bi-niʿmati'llāhi yajḥadūn / yakfurūn | Two questions one after the other |
| 6 | 81 | A purpose — laʿallakum tuslimūn | Why the enumeration is made |
| 7 | 83 | A diagnosis — yaʿrifūna … thumma yunkirūnahā | The enumeration closes |
And the sequence itself builds a movement, and I record this as my own reading: the sūra begins with a qualification (who understands), passes to a question (are they equal), arrives at a ruling (you cannot count them), ties it to a purpose (submit), and closes with a diagnosis (they recognise, then deny). The enumeration thus advances from an operation of knowledge to an accounting.
| Word / root | Where | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| نعمة | 18, 53, 71, 72, 83 — niʿmatahū (81) — anʿum (112, 121) | The sūra's backbone; its plural in two places only |
| أ-م-ر | 1, 2, 12, 33, 50, 77, 90 | It binds three planes: the cosmic, the historical and the moral |
| ب-ي-ن | 39, 44, 64, 89, 92 | The work of making clear is distributed among three subjects and two times |
| ج-د-ل / خ-ص-م | khaṣīmun mubīn (4) — tujādilu ʿan nafsihā (111) — jādilhum (125) | Identification → helplessness → method |
| ظِلّ | yatafayyaʾu ẓilāluhū (48) — jaʿala lakum … ẓilālā (81) | The same fact: proof and favour |
| Water | anzala mina'l-samāʾi māʾan (10) — the same expression (65) | The same fact: benefit and proof |
| نخيل وأعناب | 11 — 67 | Its raw state and its processed state |
| س-ل-م | alqawu'l-salam (28) — alqaw ila'llāhi'l-salam (87) — tuslimūn (81) — al-muslimīn (89, 102) | The three faces of surrender |
| ط-م-ن | qalbuhū muṭmaʾinn (106) — qaryatan … muṭmaʾinna (112) | The one within held; the one without was lost |
| م-ك-ر | 26, 45, 127 | Finished history → threat → reason for consolation |
| مثل / ضرب مثلا | li'llāhi'l-mathalu'l-aʿlā (60) — lā taḍribū li'llāhi'l-amthāl (73) — ḍaraba'llāhu mathalan (75, 76, 112) | Prohibition and command from the same root |
| لا جرم | 23, 62, 109 | Three times, and all three before a ruling |
| مَاذَآ أَنزَلَ رَبُّكُمْ | 24 — 30 | The same question, two different mouths, two different answers |
| رءوف رحيم | 7 — 47 | The one after a favour, the other after a threat |
| ن-ك-ر | qulūbuhum munkira (22) — yunkirūnahā (83) — al-munkar (90) | State → act → category |
| إذا فجائية | fa-idhā huwa khaṣīmun mubīn (4) — idhā farīqun minkum … yushrikūn (54) | Two passages, the same leap |
| ثبت | baʿda thubūtihā (94) — li-yuthabbita (102) | Firmness lost and firmness given |
| لو شاء | 9 (the text) — 35 (the addressees) | The same sentence, two different mouths |
| البلاغ المبين | 35, 82 | Both after an objection |
| ما ظلمناهم / ولكن كانوا أنفسهم يظلمون | 33 — 118 | The same sentence, two contexts |
| The pattern of dispensation | illā man ukriha (106) — fa-mani'ḍṭurra (115) | A passive verb + an inward qualification |
| The closing verbs | yatafakkarūn (11, 69) — yaʿqilūn (12, 67) — yadhdhakkarūn (13) — yasmaʿūn (65) — yuʾminūn (79) — tuslimūn (81) | Five verbs of cognition, one verb of stance |
| Subject | In this sūra | Where it was treated |
|---|---|---|
| A future event with a perfect verb | 16/1 — atā | al-Qamar 54/1, al-Anbiyāʾ 21/1 |
| Khaṣīmun mubīn | 16/4 | Yāsīn 36/77 |
| The diagnosis of disputation | 16/4, 111, 125 | al-Kahf 18/54, Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), al-Mujādala |
| The leaving open of the list | 16/8 — mā lā taʿlamūn | Yāsīn 36/36 |
| Rawāsī and mayd | 16/15 | Luqmān 31/10, Qāf 50/7 |
| Meat and ornament from the sea | 16/14 | Fāṭir 35/12 |
| Mukhtalifun alwānuhā | 16/13, 16/69 | Fāṭir 35/27-28, al-Rūm 30/22 |
| The series of closing verbs | 16/11-81 | al-Rūm 30/20-25, 30/46 |
| The principle that no burden is carried for another | 16/25 | Fāṭir 35/18, al-Isrāʾ 17/15 |
| The messengers being human | 16/43 | al-Anbiyāʾ 21/7-8, al-Aḥqāf 46/9 |
| The disagreement over ahl al-dhikr | 16/43 | al-Anbiyāʾ 21/7 |
| The proof from the shadow | 16/48 | al-Furqān 25/45-46 |
| Tafayyuʾ — ف-ي-ء | 16/48 | al-Ḥujurāt 49/9 |
| Dākhirūn | 16/48 | Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/60 |
| The scene of the infant daughter | 16/57-59 | al-Takwīr 81/8-9, al-Zukhruf 43/17-18, al-Shams 91/10 |
| Law yuʾākhidhu'llāhu'l-nās | 16/61 | Fāṭir 35/45 |
| Sāʾigh | 16/66 | Fāṭir 35/12 |
| The scope of the root waḥy | 16/68 | al-Najm 53/4, al-Shūrā 42/3, al-Zilzāl |
| The most abject stage of life | 16/70 | al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/111, al-Tīn 95/5 |
| The parable of the slave | 16/71 | al-Rūm 30/28 |
| Spouses and descent | 16/72 | al-Rūm 30/21 |
| The two parables | 16/75-76 | al-Zumar 39/29 |
| The triad hearing-eyes-hearts | 16/78 | al-Sajda 32/9, al-Aḥqāf 46/26, al-Jāthiya 45/23, Fuṣṣilat 41/20, al-Mulk 67/23 |
| Birds held up in the air | 16/79 | al-Mulk 67/19 |
| Imsāk | 16/79 | Fāṭir 35/2, 35/41 |
| ʿAdl and iḥsān | 16/90 | al-Ḥujurāt 49/9, al-Mulk 67/2, al-Shūrā 42/40 |
| ن-ك-ث — the unravelling of the thread | 16/92 | al-Fatḥ 48/10 |
| Recompense not divided by sex | 16/97 | al-Wāqiʿa, al-Nabaʾ, al-Zukhruf |
| Istiʿādha | 16/98 | Fuṣṣilat 41/33-36, al-Falaq, al-Nās |
| Aʿjamī / ʿarabī | 16/103 | al-Zukhruf 43/1-4 |
| Iṭmiʾnān | 16/106 | al-Baqara 2/260 |
| The sealed triad | 16/108 | al-Rūm 30/58-59, al-Jāthiya 45/23 |
| The secure town | 16/112 | al-Qaṣaṣ 28/57, al-ʿAnkabūt 29/67 |
| The four-item list of prohibitions | 16/115 | al-Baqara 2/173 |
| Laying down rulings by ascription to God | 16/116 | al-Baqara 2/169 |
| Repentance + iṣlāḥ | 16/119 | al-Shūrā 42/40, al-Ḥujurāt 49/9-10 |
| Ḥanīf | 16/120, 123 | al-Rūm 30/30 |
| Bi'llatī hiya aḥsan | 16/125 | Fuṣṣilat 41/34, al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46, al-Qaṣaṣ 28/54 |
| The right of recompense and the superiority of patience | 16/126 | al-Shūrā 42/40-43 |
| The source of patience | 16/127 | Fuṣṣilat 41/33-36 |
| The prohibition of grieving and of distress | 16/127 | al-Naml 27/70, al-Ḥadīd |
| Maʿa'llāh and muḥsinūn | 16/128 | al-ʿAnkabūt 29/69 |
| Root | Word | Verse |
|---|---|---|
| د-ف-أ | difʾ — that which warms | 5 |
| س-ر-ح | tasraḥūn — to drive out to pasture | 6 |
| س-و-م | tusīmūn — to let an animal graze at large | 10 |
| م-خ-ر | mawākhir — going by cleaving the water | 14 |
| ج-أ-ر | tajʾarūn — to bellow in pain | 53 |
| و-ص-ب | wāṣib — continuous / obligatory | 52 |
| ف-ر-ث | farth — the digested fodder in the stomach | 66 |
| ح-ف-د | ḥafada — those who serve at a run | 72 |
| ج-و-و | jaww — the open space between earth and sky | 79 |
| ظ-ع-ن | ẓaʿn — to migrate | 80 |
| ب-ك-م | abkam — mute | 76 |
| د-خ-ل | dakhal — a corrupting element pushed inside | 92 |
| غ-ز-ل | ghazl — spun yarn | 92 |
| ن-ق-ض | naqaḍa — to unravel what was plaited | 91 |
| ف-ر-ط | mufraṭūn — sent on ahead / overstepping | 62 |
| ع-ج-م | aʿjamī — one whose speech is not understood | 103 |
| س-ك-ر | sakar — to cut off a flow; drunkenness | 67 |
| Verse | The disagreement |
|---|---|
| 1 | What amru'llāh is — the Hour, punishment, decree |
| 2 | What rūḥ is — revelation, Gabriel, prophethood |
| 9 | Qaṣdu'l-sabīl — a genitive or a verbal noun |
| 12 | The variant reading of wa'l-nujūmu musakhkharātun |
| 20 | The referent of the pronoun in ayyāna yubʿathūn |
| 23 | The origin of the form lā jarama |
| 40 | The variant reading fa-yakūn / fa-yakūna |
| 43 | Who the ahl al-dhikr are — three views |
| 43 | The scope of the word rijāl |
| 47 | Takhawwuf — fear, or diminishing |
| 48 | al-Yamīn singular, al-shamāʾil plural — three explanations |
| 50 | What min fawqihim attaches to |
| 52 | Wāṣib — continuous or obligatory |
| 55 | Li-mā lā yaʿlamūn — who does not know |
| 62 | The variant reading mufraṭūn / mufriṭūn / mufarriṭūn |
| 67 | What sakar is — three views; and no legal ruling was issued |
| 69 | Whose state dhululan describes |
| 69 | Fīhi shifāʾun — the referent of the pronoun and its scope; no medical ruling was issued |
| 71 | The work of the parable — two readings |
| 72 | Who the ḥafada are — three views |
| 89 | Tibyānan li-kulli shayʾ — its scope |
| 92 | The ascribing of the parable to a particular person — no name was given |
| 97 | Where the ḥayātan ṭayyiba is — three views |
| 98 | Idhā qaraʾta — before or after; no legal ruling was issued |
| 102 | Who rūḥ al-qudus is |
| 106 | The scope of the ruling on compulsion — no legal ruling was issued; no name was attached to the account of the occasion |
| 112 | Which town it is — no name was given |
| 115 | Bāgh and ʿād — two explanations; no legal ruling was issued |
| 119 | Jahāla — ignorance or thoughtlessness |
| 120 | Umma used of one man — three explanations |
Limits set per the method (Method)
| Verse | Subject | The limit set |
|---|---|---|
| 4 | Nuṭfa | Not equated with the terms of modern embryology (the limit set in Yāsīn was repeated) |
| 8 | Mā lā taʿlamūn | The item left empty was not filled |
| 15 | The mountains | Not turned into a geological or physical claim |
| 43 | Fa'sʾalū ahla'l-dhikr | Not torn from its context and presented as a general principle of authority |
| 57-59 | The female child | The subject treated was not woman but the stance of a society |
| 66 | Milk | Not read as a description of physiology |
| 69 | Honey and healing | Not turned into a medical claim; kept within the three notes of the wording |
| 76 | The parable of the mute man | No ruling was laid down about a disabled person |
| 103 | Aʿjamī | No value-judgement was laid down about a language or a people |
| 106 | Compulsion | No legal ruling was issued; no personal name was attached to the account of the occasion |
| 116 | Lawful and forbidden | The verse itself was recorded as the ground of this commentary's limit against issuing legal rulings |
| 118 | A community | No wholesale ruling was laid down; the ruling was tied to an attribute |
The sūra opened with news of an arrival: atā amru'llāh — it has come. And immediately a prohibition was laid down: do not seek to hasten it.
In the fourth verse a diagnosis was entered: man, the moment he comes out of a drop, is khaṣīmun mubīn — an open disputant.
Then the enumeration began and ran for thirteen verses, was cut off, opened again at the sixty-fifth verse and closed at the eighty-first. Twenty items were enumerated in between.
And in the middle of the enumeration there is a passage about a bee, two verses long. The sūra takes its name from there.
I record this as my own reading, and my ground is the sūra's own structure: the bee is the smallest item on the list. And the reason it was chosen is that it is the item that shows the logic of the enumeration most plainly — for there a creature does what is communicated to it, and something of use to man comes out. The favour, then, is enumerated not as a ready-made object but as the product of an order at work.
And the sūra's diagnosis is given in the eighty-third verse: yaʿrifūna niʿmata'llāhi thumma yunkirūnahā. The trouble is not a failure to see the list — it is the rejecting of it after seeing. And the ruling of the eighteenth verse had prepared this in advance: the list cannot be counted in any case; the point is not to arrive at a number.
The sūra's last four verses give a work to the man whose condition it diagnosed: call (125), dispute — but in the best manner (125), if you answer back, answer with the like (126), be patient (127), and your patience is not of yourself (127).
And the sūra closes with two attributes: ittaqaw and muḥsinūn. The iḥsān commanded in the ninetieth verse comes back in the hundred and twenty-eighth as an identity.
In the fourth verse man was named a disputant; in the hundred and twenty-fifth that same man is taught the method of disputation. The sūra neither ignores nor forbids the tendency it diagnoses. It binds it to a direction — just as the ways were shown to the bee.